JP6806512B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

As a game machine of this type, it is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on a predetermined design value (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 5770922

With the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the gaming machine is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value after being installed in the gaming store.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming whether or not it is controlled advantageously based on a predetermined design value. And.

(1) A variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, is provided.
In a gaming machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A game control means that controls the game,
An effect control means that performs an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result,
The first notification means controlled by the game control means and
The second notification means controlled by the effect control means and
With
The game control means
Predetermining means to determine the display result that allows derivation,
A means for controlling to derive a display result, and when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific determination result of any one of a plurality of types of specific determination results, the type of the specific determination result. When the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode according to the above, it is more advantageous for the player than when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode other than the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. Derivation control means that controls the derivation of various display results,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result, the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. A first notification control means capable of controlling,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result and the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. The operation mode control information transmitting means for transmitting the operation mode control information capable of specifying the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result to the effect control means is included.
When the effect control means receives the operation mode control information, the effect control means transmits the effect operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result specified from the operation mode control information to the second notification means. Including a second notification control means for controlling notification
The operation mode control information transmitting means transmits the operation mode control information to the effect control means before the notification of the game operation mode information is started by the first notification means.
The first notification control means is
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the game operation mode information.
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, even when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, the notification of the game operation mode information is continued. Take control and
The second notification control means is
After starting the notification of the effect operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the effect operation mode information.
Control to end the notification of the effect operation mode information when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information after the notification of the effect operation mode information is started. And
The game machine
When a grant prize that accompanies the granting of game value occurs, a game value-adding means that grants a number of game values according to the type of the grant prize, and
Advantageous control means to control in favor of the player,
The total number of game values granted in a specific period The ratio of the total number of game values granted in a specific advantageous period to the total number granted in a specific period, which is the total number of game values granted in an advantageously controlled period. A calculation method for calculating the advantageous period grant ratio,
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio, and
A notification means for identifiablely notifying the specific advantageous period grant ratio calculated by the calculation means, and
Excess avoidance means for preventing the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio from exceeding the upper limit value, and
Data storage means that can read and write data,
With more
The numerical value updating means updates the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period granting ratio without waiting for the granting of the game value to be completed when the display result in which the granting prize is generated is derived.
The game control means controls based on the first program and the second program called by the first program.
The data storage means includes a variable data storage area capable of storing data used when the game control means performs control based on a program, and a stack area for temporarily storing data used by the program.
The variable data storage area is
A first variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the first program and not updated in the second program.
A second variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the second program but not updated in the first program.
Including
The stack area is
A first stack area for temporarily saving data used by the first program, and
A second stack area for temporarily saving data used by the second program, and
Including
The first variable data storage area is an area from the start address to the first address of the variable data storage area.
The first stack area is an area from the second address to the third address after the first address of the variable data storage area.
The second variable data storage area is an area from the fourth address to the fifth address after the third address of the variable data storage area.
The second stack area is an area from the sixth address after the fifth address of the variable data storage area.
When the game control means calls the second program from the first program, the game control means saves the data used by the first program in the first stack area in the first program, and then calls the second program. The process based on the second program is executed, and after the process based on the second program is completed, the data used by the first program is returned from the first stack area in the first program.
(2) A variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, is provided.
In a gaming machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A game control means that controls the game,
An effect control means that performs an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result,
The first notification means controlled by the game control means and
The second notification means controlled by the effect control means and
With
The game control means
Predetermining means to determine the display result that allows derivation,
A means for controlling to derive a display result, and when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific determination result of any one of a plurality of types of specific determination results, the type of the specific determination result. When the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode according to the above, it is more advantageous for the player than when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode other than the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. Derivation control means that controls the derivation of various display results,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result, the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. A first notification control means capable of controlling,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result and the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. The operation mode control information transmitting means for transmitting the operation mode control information capable of specifying the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result to the effect control means is included.
When the effect control means receives the operation mode control information, the effect control means transmits the effect operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result specified from the operation mode control information to the second notification means. Including a second notification control means for controlling notification
The operation mode control information transmitting means transmits the operation mode control information to the effect control means before the notification of the game operation mode information is started by the first notification means.
The first notification control means is
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the game operation mode information.
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, even when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, the notification of the game operation mode information is continued. Take control and
The second notification control means is
After starting the notification of the effect operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the effect operation mode information.
Control to end the notification of the effect operation mode information when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information after the notification of the effect operation mode information is started. And
The game machine
Advantageous control means to control in favor of the player,
A calculation means for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, which is the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, which is the number of games controlled advantageously in the specific period to the number of games in the specific period.
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, and
A notification means for identifiablely notifying the ratio of the number of games during a specific advantageous period calculated by the calculation means, and
Excess avoidance means for preventing the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period to exceed the upper limit value, and
Data storage means that can read and write data,
With more
The numerical value updating means updates the numerical value necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period without waiting for the granting of the game value to be completed when the display result in which the grant prize is generated is derived.
The game control means controls based on the first program and the second program called by the first program.
The data storage means includes a variable data storage area capable of storing data used when the game control means performs control based on a program, and a stack area for temporarily storing data used by the program.
The variable data storage area is
A first variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the first program and not updated in the second program.
A second variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the second program but not updated in the first program.
Including
The stack area is
A first stack area for temporarily saving data used by the first program, and
A second stack area for temporarily saving data used by the second program, and
Including
The first variable data storage area is an area from the start address to the first address of the variable data storage area.
The first stack area is an area from the second address to the third address after the first address of the variable data storage area.
The second variable data storage area is an area from the fourth address to the fifth address after the third address of the variable data storage area.
The second stack area is an area from the sixth address after the fifth address of the variable data storage area.
When the game control means calls the second program from the first program, the game control means saves the data used by the first program in the first stack area in the first program, and then calls the second program. The process based on the second program is executed, and after the process based on the second program is completed, the data used by the first program is returned from the first stack area in the first program.
The game machine of means 1
Variable display unit (reel 2L, 2C) that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each
, 2R)
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
Game control means (main control unit 41) that controls the game,
The effect control means (sub control unit 91) that performs the effect based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means (stop switch 8L, which is operated by the player to derive the display result.
8C, 8R) and
Notification means (game auxiliary display 12) capable of performing notification, and
A design value suggestion means (game information display 50) that suggests whether or not the control is advantageous to the player based on the design value, and
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
After the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is started, the derivation operation activation means that activates the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means when the activation condition is satisfied,
With the notification means (game auxiliary display 12), the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L,
8C, 8R) notification control means capable of performing control (navigation notification) to notify operation mode information (navigation number) capable of identifying the operation mode,
Including
The derivation operation activation means is re-enabled after the power supply is restarted when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is enabled. The operation (stop operation) of the derivation operation means is not enabled until the condition is satisfied.
The notification control means controls (navigation notification) to notify the operation mode information (navigation number) by the notification means (game auxiliary display 12) in a state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled. When the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state of being in the state, the notification means (game auxiliary display 12) is performed at a timing earlier than the operation of the out-licensing operation means is enabled.
The feature is that the control (navigation notification) for notifying the operation mode information (navigation number) is restarted.
According to this feature, by providing the design value suggesting means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control is advantageous to the player based on the predetermined design value.
Further, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, the derivation operation means is used until the activation condition is satisfied again after the power supply is restarted. Since the operation of is not enabled, it is possible to prevent the display result from being derived in a situation where it is unknown whether the rotation is normal after the power supply is restarted.
Further, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled and the control for notifying the operation mode information is performed by the notification means.
Since the control for notifying the operation mode information by the notification means is restarted at a timing earlier than the operation of the derivation operation means is enabled, the player erroneously operates the operation mode without knowing that the operation mode information has been notified. It is possible to prevent the derivation operation means from being operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode identified by the information.

In the means 1, the operation mode of the derived operation means includes an operation mode in which the derivative operation means is operated at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode in which the derivation operation means is operated in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and the like. The operation mode depending on the combination is applicable.
Further, the activation condition in which the operation of the out-licensing operation means is activated after the variable display of the variable display unit is started in the means 1, and the effect in which the operation of the out-licensing operation means is activated after the power supply is restarted. The chemical conditions may be the same or different.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control part. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM and RAM mounted on the main control part. It is a figure which shows the detail of the memory map of ROM and RAM mounted on the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game program and a non-game program. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. (A) is a flowchart showing a processing flow when calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the main process, and (b) is based on the game program during execution of the timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing when calling a non-game program from processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initial setting process executed by the main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change processing executed by the main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game area initialization processing which the main control part executes. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the non-game area initialization processing executed by the main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the power failure process (main) executed by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the area of the RAM which the main control part initializes when the 1st condition and the 2nd condition are satisfied. It is a flowchart which shows the control content when the main control part determines the value of a timer counter. It is a figure which shows the storage area of the timer counter in RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the time counter update process executed by the main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process flow at the time of calling a non-game program from the process based on a game program during execution of a timer interrupt process. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state which is a lottery target, the setting difference, the presence or absence of an AT lottery, and whether or not it is a navigation target, about the lottery target role which concerns a re-game among the lottery target roles in an internal lottery. Among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, which are the lottery target roles in the internal lottery, the lottery target roles related to AT control, the game status to be drawn, the setting difference, the presence or absence of the AT lottery, and the navigation target. It is a figure for demonstrating whether or not it becomes. For the lottery target roles in the internal lottery that are not related to AT control among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, the game status, setting difference, presence / absence of AT lottery, and navigation target It is a figure for demonstrating whether or not it becomes. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination which stops according to the stop operation mode by a lottery target combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination which stops according to the stop operation mode by a lottery target combination. It is a figure which shows the winning number of a special combination, the winning number for transmission, and the navigation number in the 1st internal winning command transmitted by a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the winning number of the small winning combination and the replay winning combination, the winning number for transmission, and the navigation number in the 2nd internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the navigation number which the main control part notifies by the navigation notification. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the push order command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning judgment command setting processing performed by the main control unit. It is a timing chart for explaining the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for explaining the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in a reel rotation process. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the establishment timing of the reel rotation error in the reel rotation processing. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the establishment timing of the stop operation activation condition in the reel rotation processing after power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game auxiliary display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode by the navigation notification. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 and 2 of the notification mode by a navigation notification. It is a figure which shows the notification mode by error notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display in a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display before and after a power failure. It is a timing chart which shows the selection situation of the excitation pattern of a reel motor in the control of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display when an error occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the control concerning the switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary display. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the modification of the control concerning the switching of the display mode of a game auxiliary display. It is a figure which shows the signal which is input / output between a slot machine and a test apparatus. It is a front view of the housing which shows the internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the display example of the game machine information display. It is a figure which shows the aggregation method of the data displayed on the game machine information display. It is a figure which shows the data which is extracted in the extraction process. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification mode by navigation notification in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game.

A mode for carrying out the slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

When the first embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a housing 1a having an open front surface and a housing 1a of the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. It is composed of a front door 1b rotatably supported at a side end.

As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference are arranged. ) Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged like this.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheral parts of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a", and "cherry", respectively. Twenty-one each of a plurality of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "b", "bell", "replay a", "replay b", and "plum" are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided at substantially the center of the front door 1b.

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) provided corresponding to each, so that the symbols of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are continuous with the perspective window 3. While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the perspective window 3 as a display result.

Inside the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, there are reel sensors 33L, 33C and 33R that detect the reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from the back. , Are provided. Further, the reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and each symbol can be independently irradiated.

A display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that has transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and passes through the transmission region 51b and the perspective window 3 corresponding to the perspective window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b has a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player-owned game value). MAXBET switch 6, which is operated when setting the maximum number of bets among the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within that range, and the setting of medals and bets stored as credits. Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the medals used for (returning the medals used for setting credits and bets), start switch 7 operated when starting the game, reels 2L, 2C The stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when the rotation of the 2Rs is stopped, and the effect switch 56 used for the effect are provided so as to be operable by the player.

In this embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as the first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as the first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called the second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is called the third stop. Alternatively, it is called a final stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b shows a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code, information that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification described later, 1 BETLED 14 that notifies by lighting that the bet number is set to 1, and 2 bets are set. 2BETLED15 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set, 3BETLED16 that notifies by lighting that the number of bets is set 3, insertion request LED17 that notifies by lighting that a medal can be inserted, and a game by operating the start switch 7. A start effective LED18 that notifies by lighting that the start operation is valid, and a lighting that notifies that the wait (a state of waiting for the start of rotation of the reel because a certain period of time has not passed since the previous game start) is in progress. A game display unit 13 provided with a weighting LED 19 and a replaying LED 20 for notifying by lighting that a replay game is in progress is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch effective LED21 (see FIG. 4) is provided to notify by lighting that the bet number setting operation by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is effective, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided to notify by lighting that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the effect switch 56 to notify by lighting that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective.

Inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state described later and a reset operation for canceling a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and a change of a setting value described later. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time while checking the inside or the set value, and a hit that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is performed) at a predetermined trigger. Stop switch 36a for selecting enable / disable of the stop function, automatic control to automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined trigger The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting the enable / disable of the settlement function and the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided on the side of the hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided inside the housing 1a. Alternatively, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either one of the medal payout outlet 9 sides, a medal insertion unit 31 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side, and an insertion medal sensor. A medal selector 29 having a slot sensor 26 for detecting the insertion of foreign matter on the upstream side of 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

Inside the housing 1a, as shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), and the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, are located. Reel unit 2 composed of detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal (see FIG. 4), and medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are stored. The hopper tank 34a, the hopper motor 34b for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 4), and the payout sensor 34c for detecting the medal paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4). A hopper unit 34 and a power supply box 100 (see FIG. 4) are provided.

An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the stored medals are full is provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front surface of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in normal times. However, in the setting change state, the reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery described later, and the power supply that is operated when the power is turned on / off. A switch 39 is provided.

Since the power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation possessed by a clerk or the like, the power supply box 100 is provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100. The setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 can be operated only by a clerk or the like who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after opening the front door 1b by key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the setting key switch 37 among the clerk of the amusement park. It is possible to operate.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or the number of bets is set using credits. To use the credit, operate the MAXBET switch 6. When the specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. If more than the maximum number of medals are inserted out of the specified number corresponding to the gaming state, that amount will be added to the credit.

The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage is used as the winning line. It is set. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning, the invalid lines LM1 to 4 are set separately from the winning line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM1 to 4 are not determined to win by the combination of the symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to 4, but are invalid lines when the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting a specific winning. By configuring the combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that will be awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of LM1 to LM4, the symbols constituting the winning line LN are the symbols that constitute a specific winning. This makes it easier to recognize that the combinations are complete.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, and the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the lower stage of the invalid lines LM1 and the reel 2L set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the upper stage. , Lower reel 2C, lower reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower row, upper reel 2L, middle reel 2C, lower reel 2R, that is, lined down to the right. However, there are four types of invalid line LM: invalid line LM3 set across the symbols, lower row of reel 2L, middle row of reel 2C, upper row of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set across the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as.

Further, in this embodiment, as a winning combination, a prize is won when a predetermined combination of symbols defined as a winning combination (for example, "bell-watermelon-cherry b") is prepared in the winning line LN, and a predetermined symbol is also obtained. By aligning the combinations, any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 has a symbol combination (for example, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon") that is an index that is easier to recognize than a predetermined symbol combination, and thus the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 Includes roles that can be made to appear as if they have won a prize by combining the symbols that match any of the above. In the following, when a predetermined combination of symbols is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of symbols aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is referred to as a symbol combination as an index, and a combination of symbols as an index is configured. The symbol is called an index symbol.

When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game ends, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) predetermined on the winning line is the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. If it is stopped as, a prize will be generated, and a number of medals determined according to the prize will be given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the maximum number of credits (50 in this embodiment) is reached, medals are directly paid out from the medal payout outlet 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state stops on the winning line as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the combination of symbols is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of symbols.

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

Further, in this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, the winning may be determined based on the combination of the display results derived to all the two or more reels. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display device is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

Further, in the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start the fluctuation of the symbol, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute and change the symbol of 80 x 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames, so that a maximum of 4 frames can be drawn in 190 ms. You will be able to do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead of the stops, for a total of 5 frames.

Therefore, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, when the symbol displayed at the bottom of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol is up to 4 frames ahead. Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L and 8R is operated in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Designs arranged within 5 frames including the above can be displayed on the winning line.

In the following, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels when it is not necessary to distinguish them. Further, the reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C may be referred to as a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be referred to as a right reel. Further, the operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C and 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90 controls the game state. The effect is controlled according to the above, and the drive power supply for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 101 and supplied to each part.

An AC100V power supply is supplied to the power supply board 101 from the outside, and a DC voltage required for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply, so that the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, the above-mentioned hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the input medal sensor 31, and the door opening. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 described above are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input. Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BETLED 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start effective LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and the hopper motor 34b described above is connected via the power supply board 101. These electric components are connected and are driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

Further, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a game machine information display composed of a 7-segment display is displayed below the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. The vessel 50 is arranged. In the game machine information display 50, the display contents can be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and the display contents are tabulated by the main control unit 41 described later. , The clerk or the like can recognize the information such as the advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the game machine information display 50.

The game control board 40 has a main control unit 41 that performs processing related to the progress of the game and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40, and an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit 42 that generates a control clock CCLK, a random clock generation circuit 43 that generates a random clock RCLK that is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK, and a game control board. The switch detection circuit 44 that takes in the detection signal input from the switches connected directly to the 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits it to the main control unit 41, and the motor drive signal (stepping) output from the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 that transmits the phase signal of the motor to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the solenoid drive circuit 46 that transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the main control. The LED drive circuit 47 that transmits the LED drive signal output from the unit 41 to various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 and the voltage of the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1 are monitored to reduce the voltage drop. A power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main control unit 41 when detected, and the main control unit 41 in a state where the power supply is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off. It is equipped with a reset circuit 49 that gives a system reset signal to the device.

FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a collation block 503, a unique information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, and the like. CPU (Central Processing
Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a, 508b, timer circuit 509, interrupt controller 510, and parallel input. It includes a port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decoding circuit 514.

The reset / interrupt controller 506 is for controlling various resets and interrupt requests that occur inside or outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interrupt controller 506 includes an out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit that monitors whether or not the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when it detects that the user program is executed outside the designated area. Further, the watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a timeout signal for each set period.

The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between the external bus and the internal bus of the chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function for each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by dividing the control clock CCLK by two or the like. The collation block 503 has a function of connecting to an external collation machine and collating chips. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information that is internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various variable data to the RAM 41c and temporarily stores them, and a CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. Variable data read operation to read various variable data, CPU 41a receives input of various signals from the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, parallel input port 511, serial communication circuit 512, etc., CPU 41a Also performs transmission operations such as outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area or the like for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

An 8-bit free run counter is mounted as the free run counter circuit 507. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data such as 8-bit random numbers and 16-bit random numbers, which are random number values having a predetermined update range. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b out of the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, which counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when it reaches 0000H. In this embodiment, the timer circuit 509 can be used to perform periodic interrupt requests and time measurement.

The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls an external interrupt request from an interrupt terminal and an interrupt request from a built-in peripheral circuit (for example, serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a, 508b, timer circuit 509). .. The parallel input port 511 has a built-in 8-bit wide input-only port. Further, the parallel output port 513 included in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 has a built-in 11-bit wide output dedicated port. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output to the outside.

The address decoding circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block inside the main control unit 41 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decoding signal for an external device. The chip select signal enables the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device as a peripheral device to be selectively and effectively operated to be accessed from the CPU 41a.

For example, when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which a program or the like is not stored, or when there is an access to an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c for which access prohibition is set. That is, by generating an illegal access reset when there is an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, the progress of the game is disabled, and the unused area and operation of ROM 41b are disabled. Even when an illegal program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, or the like, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

Further, the main control unit 41 is activated when an internal or external reset occurs. At this time, the value set in the vector table assigned to the ROM 41b and in which the start address of the interrupt process is set. However, it is judged whether it is a value indicating unused or a value indicating the area where the program etc. is actually stored, and if it is neither of the values, it is not started and interrupts. It is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to an occurrence or the like.

The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41. Further, in this embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal, but the command is transmitted via the serial communication circuit 512. A configuration in which a command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, that is, a configuration in which the command is transmitted as a serial signal may be used.

Further, the main control unit 41 inputs the detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. Then, the main control unit 41 executes the main process of gradually shifting according to the detection states of the various switches input from the parallel input ports 511. Further, the main control unit 41 can interrupt the main process and execute the interrupt process when the interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment) when a timeout occurs in the timer circuit 509. Further, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, a predetermined order is obtained. The interrupt to be executed with priority is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, the interrupt is interrupted when the interrupt process is completed. The ban will be automatically lifted, at which point a new interrupt will occur. In addition, it is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and the interrupt prohibition is not automatically canceled when the interrupt process is completed, but the interrupt process is performed. Other interrupts may be prohibited by the program at the start, and the interrupt prohibition may be canceled by the program at the end of the interrupt process.

The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and responds to the change in the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process of gradual migration. Further, the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to be longer than the total time of the time in which the process repeated according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). This means that the process of repeating the timer interrupt process (main) between this time and the next time according to the control state always completes at least one cycle.

An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. Further, an effect device such as a liquid crystal display 51, an effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, and a reel LED 55 is connected, and these effect devices are controlled by a sub control unit 91 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. It is designed to be driven based on. In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be used. The output control of the production device is performed by both units. Further, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53, 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and for example, a mechanically driven display is used. A device or a mechanically driven role object may be applied as a directing device.

The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 composed of a microcomputer provided with a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d to control the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. The display control circuit 92 that controls the display, the effect LED 52, the LED drive circuit 93 that controls the drive of the reel LED 55, and the audio output circuit 94 that controls the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, when the power is turned on or A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and a switch detection circuit 96 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90. , The clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and when the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating that fact is sent to the sub CPU 91a. A power failure detection circuit 98 that outputs to the device, other circuits, and the like are mounted.

The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect according to a program for effect control stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Control each part of the control circuit directly or indirectly.

In the game control board 40, the reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41, and the sub control unit 91 controls the main control when the power is turned on. It is designed to start at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power failure detection circuit 98 is set to have a lower voltage for outputting the voltage drop signal than the power failure detection circuit 48 for outputting the voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40, and is set to have a lower voltage when the power is cut. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a stage later than that of the main control unit 41, and performs a power failure process (sub) described later.

Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Executes command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt every time the number of input of the system clock reaches a certain number, that is, at a fixed time interval (about 2 ms), and executes a timer interrupt process (sub) described later. Further, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of a command, even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and even if the interrupt that triggers the timer interrupt process (sub) occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority. Further, the backup power supply is also supplied to the sub control unit 91 at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power supply is supplied.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the lottery that affects the advantage to the player such as the internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the changed state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, the setting value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is fixed as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game shifts to a state in which the game can proceed. Further, since the main control unit 41 initializes the RAM 41c as it shifts to the setting change state, the operation of changing the set value also functions as an operation of initializing the control state of the main control unit 41. Will be done.

It should be noted that, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 37 is on, the setting change state may be entered on condition that the door open detection switch 25 detects the opening of the front door 1b. Well, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed illegally when the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration of shifting to the setting change state on condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 corresponds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. It is preferable to maintain the setting change state even if the detection is not performed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed again. It is not necessary and the setting change operation is not complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated to confirm the set value after shifting to the setting change state, the door open detection switch 25 detects the front door 1b to be opened. On the condition that the setting is changed, the setting change state may be terminated and the game may proceed to a state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is illegally opened. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed.

Further, in order to confirm the set value, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on after the game is finished and the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value display 24 displays the setting value read from the RAM 41c, so that the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is impossible, and by turning off the setting key switch 37, the setting confirmation state ends and the game returns to the state in which the progress is possible.

After the game is over, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on when the number of bets is not set, it is a condition that the door opening detection switch 25 detects the opening of the front door 1b. In addition, a configuration that shifts to the setting confirmation state may be used, and such a configuration can prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed when the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in the configuration of shifting to the setting confirmation state on the condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 corresponds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable to maintain the setting confirmation state even if the detection is not performed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, the operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. It is not necessary and the setting confirmation operation is not complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated to confirm the set value after the transition to the setting confirmation state, the door open detection switch 25 detects the front door 1b to be opened. On the condition that the setting is confirmed, the setting confirmation state may be terminated and the game may be returned to the state in which the game can proceed. Even in such a configuration, the front door 1b is illegally not opened. It is possible to prevent the set value from being confirmed.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power failure process (main) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next return is performed. Execute.

Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, provided that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the RAM 41c data is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the RAM error error code is set in the register to control the RAM error error state, and the progress of the game is disabled.

The error state shifts to the normal error state that is canceled by the reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the setting change state described above, and is canceled until a new setting value is set. The RAM error state is a special error state, including the special error state without, and once controlled to the RAM error error state, it shifts to the setting change state and is released until a new setting value is set. Will not be done.

Further, the sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interrupt processing (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, At the next return, the power interruption process (sub) for setting the data for determining whether the data in the RAM 91c is normal is executed.

Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, provided that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

Further, even if it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation, the sub control unit 91 is activated when it receives a setting command described later indicating that the setting has been changed from the main control unit 41. The RAM 91c is initialized even when neither the return command nor the setting command, which will be described later, indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been restored is received even after a certain period of time has elapsed. In this case as well, only the RAM 91c is initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area of the storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area. Further, the game RAM area is divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area. The special work is a work in which data that is not initialized even if the set value is changed is stored, and software random numbers, set values, data indicating the game state, and the like are stored. The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of a specific game state (RB, BB) is stored, and is the LED display data, input port, output port input / output data, and game time. The timekeeping counter etc. are stored. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of a specific game state is stored, and a stop symbol, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like are stored. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used in any of the programs. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored during execution of the game program described later.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the data of the RAM 41c when the setting key switch 37 is started when the setting key switch 37 is ON and the data of the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is started. Each initial is when the initialization condition consisting of five is satisfied: when it is not destroyed, when the setting change state is finished, when the specific game state (RB, BB) is finished, and when one game is finished. Five types of initialization with different regions to be initialized are performed according to the conversion conditions.

Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 ON, and initialization 0 initializes all the usable areas. .. The initialization 1 is the initialization performed when the data of the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of starting with the setting key switch 37 ON, and in the initialization 1, the area other than the special work of the game RAM area is not. All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 2 is the initialization performed after the setting change state is completed by starting the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, and in the initialization 2, the special work and the game stack area (in use) in the game RAM area. Areas other than) are initialized. The initialization 3 is an initialization performed at the end of a specific game state, and in the initialization 3, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 4 is an initialization performed at the end of one game, and in the initialization 4, the unused area 3 of the game RAM area and the game stack area (unused) are initialized. The storage area of the data indicating the set value and the game state is allocated to the special work, and the data of the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of starting with the setting key switch 37 ON, that is, the data of the RAM 41c. If is normal and the setting is changed, the set value and the data indicating the game state will be retained. Further, the storage area of the timer counter, which will be described later, is allocated to the important work, and is held without being initialized at the end of the game or the end of a specific game state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the above-mentioned initialization, the start address and the end address are specified as the RAM addresses to be initialized, so that the main control unit 41 is one byte from the specified start address. After overwriting the data of 1 with 0, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated, and if the calculation result is 0, the process of moving to the next address is repeated until the specified end address is reached. , Initializes the RAM area in the specified address range.

When the main control unit 41 in this embodiment is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 is set at startup. In the startup setting, the status flag provided in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and the execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes the interrupt master permission flag that sets the prohibition / permission of interrupt. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating the prohibition of interrupts, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupts are prohibited. After that, after setting various functions by referring to the HW parameters described later, when a reset occurs according to the program stored in the program / data area, it is started in the interrupt-prohibited state and then executed first. Start the initial setting process.

In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets the interrupt to prohibit, then determines whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state at startup, and the setting key switch 37 is ON at startup. When it is determined that the state is in the state, the process shifts to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the special work is held and the other areas are initialized so that even after the setting is changed, a part of the control state (set value, game state, etc.) before the change can be obtained. On the other hand, when the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c can be surely eliminated by initializing all the areas of the usable area including the special work. It has become.

After initializing the RAM 41c, interrupt is set to allow, the set value is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6 each time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the ON of the start switch 7 is detected, The set value when the ON of the setting key switch 37 is detected is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is completed.

In this way, the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating that interrupts are prohibited, and the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupts are prohibited, and even in the initial setting process after startup, first , Since the initial setting process is executed after the interrupt is set to prohibit, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

Further, after the setting change processing is completed, the main control unit 41 executes a main process for stepwise processing according to the progress of the game for each game unit. Further, in the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change process is completed, the main process is started from the stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process, and the initialization of the RAM 41c after the setting change process is completed and the game unit. It is possible to initialize the RAM 41c for each unit by a common process.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the game is provided on the condition that the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. Can be started. In this embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a predetermined number of bets are set according to the gaming state.

Then, in this embodiment, when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the activated winning line (in the case of this embodiment, all winning lines are always activated, so that the following is valid. A winning line is obtained when a combination of symbols called a role is aligned on the winning line (the winning line is simply called the winning line). The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

The types of winning roles are determined according to the game status, but they can be broadly divided into small roles that involve paying out medals and re-starting the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There is a game role and a special role with a transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small role and the replay role are collectively referred to as the general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the game state to be won, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flags for the small combination and the replay combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special combination is , It is valid until the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combinations of the allowed combinations are complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of the winning combination permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

Next, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. The internal lottery is performed before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7) whether or not the main control unit 41 allows the winning of each of the above-mentioned combinations. Is determined at the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, a random number value (an integer of 0 to 65535) for the internal lottery is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work and the number of determination values of each winning combination determined according to the current gaming state, the number of bets, and the set value. It is determined whether or not to allow the prize.

In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined according to the winning combination, the current game state, and the set value to be the target of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number value for the internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). When the numbers are added and the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of determination values.

Then, the winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting an internal winning flag, navigating notification, command creation, stopping control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the like.

When the winning of any of the winning combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work is composed of a 2-byte storage area, in which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storage work in which the winning flag of the special combination is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general combination. It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when the special role is won, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and when the general role is won, the general role is won. A general role winning flag indicating that effect is set in the general role storage work. If none of the combinations and combinations of combinations are won, the special combination storage work and the general combination storage work are cleared.

Further, in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not to control the AT in a state where it is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, and whether or not to add the remaining number of games of the AT in the state where it is controlled by the AT. It is determined. If the AT is won in the internal lottery, it is subsequently controlled by the AT, and if the additional number of games remaining in the AT is won, the number of winning games is added to the number of remaining games in the AT.

Next, the stop control of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R will be described. The main control unit 41 inputs the winning number, the table index stored in the ROM 41b, and the table creation data when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating remains. Refer to it and create a stop control table for each spinning reel. Then, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected among the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referenced stop control table is slipped. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to pull in a maximum of 4 symbols to stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation to stop the reel, and stop when the stop operation is detected. It is possible to specify the stop position of a symbol from a range of up to 5 symbols including the operation position.

In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning winning combinations can be stopped together on the winning line within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames. If possible, control is performed to align and stop the winning combination, and control is performed to stop the winning combination without aligning it within a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames. If the special role and the small role are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the small role is won, the maximum on the winning line is when the stop operation is performed. If the winning small wins can be aligned and stopped within the pull-in range of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the small wins that have been won within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If it is not possible to draw in, if it is possible to align and stop the winning special roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, control is performed to align and stop them, and the winning combination is Control is performed so that the four frames are stopped without being aligned within the pull-in range. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special winning combination, and the special winning combination can be won only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn in. If the special role and the small role can be drawn in at the same time, only the small role will be drawn in, and the small role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the special role. In addition, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, the control to align the special role on the winning line is prioritized over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn in, the small role is placed on the winning line. Alignment control may be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, such as when the special role is carried over from before the previous game and the re-game combination is won, the stop operation is performed. At that time, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-game combination are aligned and stopped within a pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-game combination or the symbols constituting the re-game combination to be elected at the same time are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special role and the re-game combination are won at the same time, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Instead, all the re-game roles will be awarded. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-game combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-game combination is sure to win the prize. If the special role and the re-game role can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-game role will be drawn in, and the special role will not be aligned on the winning line at the same time as the re-game role.

In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed using a stop control table that can specify the number of slip frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. However, the stop position that can specify the stop position can be specified. A configuration that specifies the stop position from the table and stops the reel at the specified stop position, and searches for a stop position that can be stopped at the timing when the stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or stop position table. A configuration that performs stop control to specify and stop the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, and stop without using the stop control table or stop position table. A configuration in which stop control by searching and specifying a stop position may be used together, or a configuration in which a stop control table or a stop position table is partially changed to perform stop control may be used.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reel is started after the start of the game, that is, the time when the rotation of the reel is started. After the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which the counting is started from the time point is equal to or longer than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed from the start time of reel rotation of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that point, the rotation of the reel for the game in the game is started. On the other hand, after the end of one game, a specified number of bets are set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game starts. If the game time at which timing is started from that point is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel rotation is started at that point. Instead, the game waits until the game time at which timing is started from the start of reel rotation of the previous game reaches the specified time, and when the specified time is reached, the rotation of the reel is started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to output an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence status, and the like. These external output signals are output to hall equipment such as a hall computer via an information providing terminal board of a game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed.

The main control unit 41 has a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize, and a game state of RB (regular bonus). An RB signal indicating that the game is in progress, a BB signal indicating that the game state is in BB (big bonus), an AT signal indicating the start of AT described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a door opening signal described later. A setting change signal indicating that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel / serial conversion circuit, terminals for each output signal, and a connector to be connected for electrically connecting to the circuit of the information providing terminal board. Among the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the AT signal are directly output to the information providing terminal board as pulse signals via the relay circuit. .. On the other hand, the door open signal, the setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal which is a serial signal that can be individually identified by the parallel serial conversion circuit to provide information. It is output to the terminal board.

Next, a command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sends the input number command, credit command, game state command, AT state command, internal winning command, push order command, reel acceleration information command, and acceleration completion command to the sub control unit 91. , Stop operation command, number of slip frames command, stop command, game end command, winning judgment command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, return command, setting command, setting confirmation command, Send multiple types of commands, including door commands. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the type of the command and 1-byte extended data indicating the content of the command, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the type of the command from the type data.

The number of inserted medals command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the number of medals, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, when the power is restored. , Or when a medal is inserted in a state where the specified number of bets is not set, or when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number, the medal is transmitted. Further, since the input number command is transmitted when the bet number setting operation is performed, it is possible to identify that the bet number setting operation has been performed by receiving the input number command.

The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game, and in a state where a specified number of bets are set. Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

The AT state command is a command that can specify whether or not AT is in progress, the number of games remaining in AT, and the like, which will be described later, and is transmitted when the game starts and after the game state command.

The internal winning command is a command that can specify the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the AT state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not a special combination has been won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not a general combination has been won. After the first internal winning command is transmitted, the second internal winning command is transmitted.

The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is a stop when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and due to the stop operation of each reel. Each time control is performed, it is sent after the stop command is sent. In a game in which the navigation notification described later is executed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which the navigation notification described later is not executed, an advantageous stop is performed. A push order command that cannot specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted until the order is confirmed, and a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted from the time when the advantageous stop order is determined. To.

The game state command, AT state command, and internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts. Therefore, by receiving these commands, the start switch 7 is operated and the game starts. It is possible to identify that.

The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the reel rotation starts as the game progresses, and is transmitted when the reel rotation starts as the game progresses.

The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel accompanying the start of the game is completed, and after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started when the game is started, all of them are first performed. It is transmitted when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate at a constant speed.

The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and is used for the stop operation of each reel. It is transmitted every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

The slide frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the number of slide frames that move from the stop operation of the corresponding reel to the stop. Therefore, each time the stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted and then transmitted.

The stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel, and is a stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel. Is sent after the corresponding slip frame count command is sent each time.

The stop operation command, the number of sliding frames command, and the stop command can all specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and are accompanied by the stop operation of each reel. Since it is transmitted every time the stop control is performed, it is possible to specify that the stop operation of any of the reels has been performed and the reel to be stopped by receiving these commands.

The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

The winning judgment command is a command that can specify whether or not there is a winning, the combination of symbols aligned on the winning line LN, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. It is when the stop switch is pressed and the stop switch is released, and is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

Both the game end command and the winning judgment command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch. Therefore, by receiving these commands, It is possible to identify that all the operations necessary for advancing one game have been completed.

The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize or settlement of credits (including the medal used for setting the number of bets) is started. In addition, the payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning a prize and settlement of credits is completed.

The standby command is a command indicating that the game shifts to the standby state, and when the game shifts to the standby state after the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without setting the number of bets after one game ends, credits It is sent after the payout of medals by settlement (including the medal used to set the number of bets) is completed and the payout end command is sent.

The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and when the ending effect waiting time elapses after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error state and the type of error state. When an error is determined and controlled to an error state, an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state and its type is sent and reset. When the operation is performed and the error state is cleared, an error command indicating the error state is cleared is sent.

The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power failure.

The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change. When the setting change state is entered, the setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is sent, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is sent. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of the setting. ..

The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation command that indicates the start of the setting confirmation is sent, and the setting that indicates the end of the setting confirmation is sent when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), and is the number of bets for the next game when the power is turned on and when one game ends (after the game ends). Is transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

These commands are generated in the main process or the timer interrupt process (main), are temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and are transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

Next, the effect control executed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted by the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

In the timer interrupt processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer, and if an unprocessed command is stored, the earliest of them. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. are referred to based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Controls the output of various production devices. In the control pattern table, for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, a lighting mode of the effect LED 52, an output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, a lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 of the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among them, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, the effect according to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during the execution of the effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed and uses the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. That is, even if the production is not completed to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new production is performed unless the new command received is not the command that triggers the new production. The effect based on the command will be executed.

When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, it is stored in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The registered selection rate is referred to, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Therefore, even if the same command is received, a different control pattern is selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a notification period during which navigation notification can be executed to notify the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT).

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state, and the player is based on the winning number of the winning navigation notification combination. By notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the sub-control unit 91 and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51 and the like. The navigation effect using is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state not controlled by the AT.

FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main control unit 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which a program and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a program title and version can be set, and a later description. Vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) where the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are set, and parameters for setting the internal functions of the main control unit 41 in terms of hardware. Includes an HW parameter area (27A8H to 27FFH) in which is set and an unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) where access is prohibited.

The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the final address (HPRGEND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the final address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area for which access is prohibited.

The memory area of the RAM 41c is an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H) in which a usable area (F000H to F400H) that can be used as a work and a register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41 are stored. F6FFH) and unused areas (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH) whose access is prohibited.

FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 and the usable area in the RAM 41c.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, and a game data area in which the game data used by the game program is stored. It includes a used area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. ..

The progress of the game is to proceed with a series of processes constituting the game, and if it is a slot machine, the stage where the number of bets is set and the game can be started, the game is started and the reels are rotated. The stage of causing the reel to be stopped, the stage of deriving the display result, and the stage of giving the value of a medal or the like according to the display result are advanced.

The game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated, and are allocated rearward in the storage area of ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since an unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area in front of the non-programmed area, a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are stored in the storage area. It can be easily identified according to the difference between the two.

Further, the game program area and the game data area, and the non-game program area and the non-game data area are allotted to continuous areas, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the non-game area not related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous with an unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more in between, the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the progress of the game The non-game program and the non-game data area, which are not involved, can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In the above, the front and back of the storage area are the magnitude relations of the address values assigned to the storage area, and the smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. Therefore, the storage area allocated after the one storage area corresponds to the storage area having an address value larger than that of the one storage area, and the storage area allocated before the one storage area. , A storage area whose address value is smaller than that of one storage area is applicable.

Further, the game program may be allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area may be allocated in front of the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to adjacent areas with the unused area 1 in between, and even with such a configuration, the game program area related to the progress of the game , A non-game program that is not related to the progress of the game can be easily identified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, since 0 values are stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, the game program area and the game data area, the non-game program area and the non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found.

It should be noted that 1 may be stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, and even in such a configuration, the game program area, the game data area, and the non-game The program area and non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2, and even when invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found. ..

Further, if the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be allocated to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, both the game program area and the non-game program area start from an address (0H) in which the lower four digits have the same value when the address is expressed in binary, and the program / data area of ROM 41b. Of these, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from an address having the same 0 in the lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary, but also the value in the lower 1 digit when the address is expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same 0 address (0H), so the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas not only when the address is expressed in binary not only but also when it is expressed in hexadecimal. can do.

In both the game program area and the non-game program area, regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal, the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) starts from the address having the same value. The game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the value of the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits is the same 1. The same effect can be obtained with a configuration starting from the address of.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used by the non-game program as a work, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which the game program saves data, and the non-game RAM area includes a game. An area that can be referred to by the program, an area that cannot be referred to by the game program, and a non-game stack area in which the non-game program saves data are included. In this embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas, but a single stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is an area that is surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

Further, the unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous with the unused area 4 in between, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area not related to the progress of the game The non-game RAM area used by the game program and the non-game RAM area can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

In the following, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. .. Further, the unused area 1, the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

Based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the main control unit 41 permits access to the available area of the RAM 41c when the access is prohibited from the program / data area of the ROM 41b. When there is an access to an area that is not set to, when there is an access to an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b, or when there is an access to an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c. That is, since the progress of the game is disabled by generating an illegal access reset when there is an access to a memory area that is not accessed in normal operation, an area that is not related to the unused area or operation of the ROM 41b. Even when an illegal program is stored in an unused area of the RAM 41c, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and the game program area is assigned to the front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and a group of programs / data areas including an area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is collectively set to allow, the other areas, that is, the game program, the game data, and the non-game program among the program / data areas, Since access to the area after the non-game data in which the non-game data is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by a malicious program or illegal data.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and access to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area is collectively based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. Even if access to other areas is prohibited while setting the permission, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area behind the game program area and before the non-game program area, and the program / data. Of the areas, to a group of areas including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area) and to a group of areas including the non-game program (area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area). Access may be set to allow each and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even with such a configuration, the program / data area to the area where the game program or non-game program is not stored Since access to the data is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and a group of areas including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area) and a group of areas including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game area) in the program / data area. Access to each of the areas up to the data area) may be set to allow and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even with such a configuration, game programs and non-games in the program / data area may be set. Since access to the area where the program is not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by malicious programs and malicious data.

Further, in the above, the configuration is such that the area itself that allows access in the program / data area is set, but by setting the area that prohibits access in the program / data area, the area that indirectly permits access is set. It may be configured to be performed.

The main control unit 41 determines that the user program is executed when the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program running is permitted, that is, in normal operation, based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. When the user program is executed in a non-existing area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs an IAT generation signal to disable the progress of the game. Therefore, the unused area of the ROM 41b, the area unrelated to the operation, and the RAM 41c are not yet used. Even when an illegal program is stored in the used area or the like, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, the game program area and the non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, and the game program area is assigned to the front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is assigned to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program running for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While it is set as a designated area, program running is prohibited in other areas, that is, in the program / data area where game programs and non-game programs are not stored, so it is not intended due to malicious programs or illegal data. It is possible to prevent control from being performed.

Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area of the program / data area as designated areas for permitting program running. Therefore, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control due to an illegal program or illegal data.

A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area behind the game program area and before the non-game program area, and an HW parameter area. A group of areas including the area from the start address of the game program area to the final address of the non-game program in the program / data area based on the parameters set in (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area). The IAT circuit 506a may be collectively set as a designated area for permitting program running, and program running in other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area may be configured. Since the program running in the area where the game program and the non-game program are not stored is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by the malicious program or the illegal data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b that is permitted to be accessed by the program, the game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and the unused area is in front of the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the final address of the game program in the program / data area. Even if the IAT circuit 506a collectively sets the area up to the non-game data area as a designated area that allows program running and program running in other areas is prohibited, it is due to an illegal program or illegal data. It is possible to prevent unintended control from being performed.

Further, in the above, the area itself that allows the program running is set in the program / data area, but the program running is indirectly permitted by setting the area that prohibits the program running in the program / data area. The configuration may be such that an area is set.

The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and a subroutine that is called during the execution of another program.

Further, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute the program stored in the program / data area.

The CALL instruction is an instruction that calls and executes a subroutine stored at an address specified in the main routine or the subroutine. When the subroutine is called by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the designated address. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the main routine or the subroutine of the caller who executed the CALL instruction is returned.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. The normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying both the upper address and the lower address and specifying the address by the specified upper address and lower address, whereas the CALLV instruction specifies only the lower address. By doing so, it is an instruction to specify an address by a preset upper address and a specified lower address in the vector table area of ROM 41b and call the subroutine, and call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

The RST instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored in a specific address corresponding to a specified value by designating a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses, and is an instruction to execute the above-mentioned ordinary CALL. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When the subroutine is called by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored in the specific address corresponding to the specified value. Then, after the subroutine is completed, the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or subroutine of the caller who executed the RST instruction is returned.

A jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, the program does not return to the source program even if the program after the transfer ends.

Further, the main control unit 41 includes an LD instruction as an instruction for reading the data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read the data stored at the address specified in the main routine or the subroutine into the specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, the frequently used subroutines are stored in the game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is a specific value, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address, thereby setting the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. Specify, specify the lower address specified as the lower address, and call and execute the subroutine stored in the address that combines the upper and lower levels. For this reason, the upper addresses that form part of the addresses used when calling the subroutines that are used particularly frequently in the game program are set in advance as specific values in the vector table, and are based on the specific values set in the vector table. Because the address is specified, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and when calling these subroutines. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address.

The subroutines that are particularly frequently used among the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b are stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and the CALLV instruction is given in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine to be called in, and when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, these subroutines are specified by using the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address. Even if the configuration is such that the program is called and executed, it is possible to call the subroutine with a smaller amount of data than the normal CALL instruction that calls the program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address, and these subroutines can be called. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Further, the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

Further, not limited to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in the specific register, etc., and the subroutine is specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses a special CALL instruction that enables the storage address of the subroutine to be specified, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. In addition, identification values with a smaller amount of data than the addresses are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, and the storage addresses of the subroutines are set in each of these multiple areas, and the identification values are specified to identify them. Even with a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the subroutine stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. ..

Further, the game data that is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the area where the start address is a specific value in the game data area of the ROM 41b, and a special LD is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the command, and when the main control unit 41 calls the game data in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, only the lower address is specified by using a special LD command. , Even if the configuration is such that these game data are read, it is possible to call the game data with a smaller amount of data as compared with the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the game data of.

In addition, the non-game data that is particularly frequently used among the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as the upper address of the data to be read by the special LD instruction and the main control unit 41 calls the non-game data in which the upper address of the start address is the specific value, only the lower address is used by the special LD instruction. By specifying, even if the configuration is such that these non-game data are read, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data than the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. This makes it possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying an address when reading these non-game data.

Further, even in these cases, the upper address used when calling with a special LD instruction may be set to a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

In addition, a part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. If the configuration uses the special LD instruction, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. In addition, identification values that are smaller than the address are assigned to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, data storage addresses are set in each of these multiple areas, and identification values are specified. Even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of the data stored in the area corresponding to the value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when reading the data. ..

The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by WDT506b, and the above-mentioned illegal access reset occur. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt process (main) are values indicating the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored, or FFFFH (in an unused vector table area). It is determined whether it is a value to be set), and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating outside the area in which the program is set nor FFFFH, it will not start. It is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to an interruption or the like.

The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless the process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even if it is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the process based on the program, the game can be progressed. It is a program for executing processing.

As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game-dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

The game-dedicated program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power failure process, and an error process. In the game start waiting process, after the control of one game is completed, the number of bets is set by inserting medals, etc., and after the specified number of bets is set, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The internal lottery process is a process of performing an internal lottery and setting a winning flag, etc., and the reel control process is a process of starting the rotation of the reel and operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This is a process for stopping the reel with, and the game end setting process determines whether or not a prize has been generated according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and pays out medals, sets the re-game, and sets the game state. The external output 1 process is a process for performing output control of a medal IN signal, a medal OUT signal, an RB signal, a BB signal, and an RT signal among external output signals. , The initial setting process is a process for making the game possible when the power is turned on (backup abnormality confirmation, register initialization, etc.), and the power failure process is the state before the power failure after the power failure occurs. This is a process for recovering, and the error processing includes various abnormalities (medal insertion abnormality, foreign matter detection in the medal selector 29, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign matter detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality). This is a process for disabling the game when an abnormality in the set value, an empty hopper tank 34a, a full tank detection of the overflow tank 35, etc. are detected. Further, although not particularly shown, the game program also includes the above-mentioned processing related to AT (control related to lottery related to AT, control related to navigation notification, etc.).

The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, input determination processing and payout determination processing. The insertion determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally by the insertion medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where medals can be inserted for setting the number of bets and the like. The payout determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state where the medal payout is permitted at the time of winning a small winning combination or at the time of credit settlement. Is.

The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program. For example, counter update process, port input process, data conversion process, LED display process, data setting process, etc. Includes command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating the specified counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring the input state of the specified port, and the data conversion process is input using game data. It is a process of converting and outputting the data, the LED display process is a process of setting to display the specified value on the LED, and the data setting process is a process of setting the specified data. The command setting process is a process of setting a specified command in the command queue.

In particular, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the game program resets the setting value according to the type of abnormality (random number abnormality, RAM abnormality, backup abnormality, setting value abnormality, and resets it. In the case of an abnormality other than the above, it includes error processing that disables the progress of the game until the reset operation) is established.

As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and the same common determination program and common general-purpose program as the game program.

The non-game dedicated program includes, for example, test signal output processing, foreign matter detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, input medal error judgment processing, payout medal error judgment processing, power failure judgment processing, normal command transmission processing, and power failure. Includes time command transmission processing and game machine information display processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in connection with the result of the game, and the foreign matter detection process is a process for detecting a foreign matter in the medal passage by the slot sensor 26. The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a security signal (door opening signal, setting change signal, closing error signal, payout error signal) among the external output signals. This is a process for controlling the output, and the inserted medal error determination process detects the backflow of the inserted medal, the medal clogging detection in the medal selector 29, and the foreign matter detection in the medal selector 29 based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31. The payout medal error determination process is a process for performing backflow detection of payout medals, medal clogging detection near the payout exit, and foreign matter detection near the payout exit based on the detection status of the payout sensor 34c. , The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected, and the normal command transmission process is a command setting of a game-dedicated program and a non-game-dedicated program. This is a process for transmitting the first command set in the command queue by the process to the sub-control unit 91, and the command transmission process at the time of power failure is set in the command queue. This is a process for transmitting all the existing commands to the sub-control unit 91, and the game machine information display process aggregates and calculates information about the slot machine 1 such as the advantageous section ratio described later, and uses the calculation result as the result. This is a process of displaying the based information on the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40.

The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program, and like the common general-purpose program in the game program, for example, counter update process, port input process, and so on. Includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

The non-game program includes a process of determining whether or not the detection status is a predetermined detection status based on the detection status of the detection means (input port sensor 26, full tank sensor 35a, door open detection switch 25) not related to the progress of the game.

In addition, the non-game program functions as a detection means related to the progress of the game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting process, internal lottery process, reel control process, game end setting process). In other control states, the detection means (for example, the insertion medal sensor 31 and the payout sensor 34c) that functions as the detection means that is not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection status in the control state that is not related to the progress of the game. Processing to determine whether or not it is in a predetermined detection status (for example, detection processing of inserted medals and detection processing of paid medals for detecting an abnormality caused by detection of insertion of medals during reel rotation or withdrawal of medals) Including. It should be noted that such a determination process corresponds to a common determination program because it is the same process as the process of determining whether or not the detection status is a predetermined detection status based on the detection status in the control state related to the progress of the game in the game program. ..

Among the processes included in the game program, the number of medals to be paid out in the external output 1 process, the process of counting the number of medals inserted in the game start waiting process, the process of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the process of setting at the end of the game. Processing that counts, processing that detects that the hopper tank 34a is empty, processing that updates software random numbers, processing related to AT, processing that sends internal winning commands, etc. that are not directly related to the progress of the game If so, all or part of these processes may be included in the non-game program. On the other hand, if the processes included in the non-game program are indirectly related to the progress of the game, all or part of these processes may be included in the game program.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program in the process based on the game program to execute the process based on the non-game program, and after the process based on the non-game program is completed. , Return to the process based on the game program.

As shown in FIG. 9, in principle, when executing the process based on the game program, the CPU 41a executes the process based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area, and uses the game RAM area as a work. , It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. Further, in principle, when executing the process based on the non-game program, the CPU 41a executes the process based on the non-game program with reference to the game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-gaming RAM area.

Further, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing the process based on the game program, but it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area. , In executing the process based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

Further, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) required for the game program in the non-game RAM area, and can be referred to the non-game program. The processing based on the game RAM area can be referred to only a specific area required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.). In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where processing based on the non-game program can be referred to may be allocated to continuous address areas. Although it is preferable, the configuration may be such that a part or all of the address area is not contiguous.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game program area in which the game program related to the progress of the game is stored, the game data area in which the game data referred to by the game program is readable, and the work data referred to by the game program are stored. A game RAM area that is readable and writable, a non-game program area that is a program called by the game program and stores non-game programs that are not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game that the non-game program refers to. Since the non-game data area in which the data is readable and stored and the non-game RAM area in which the work data referred to by the non-game program is readable and writable are allocated separately, the game program, The game data and the work data of the game program and the non-game program, the non-game data, and the work data of the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, by separating the game program area and the game data area and the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied by the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It will be easier to identify the relevant data.

Further, in the present embodiment, the non-game RAM area can be referred to when the game program is executed, and the game RAM area can be referred to when the non-game program is executed. The data used by the non-game program can be easily used when executing the game program, and the data used by the game program can be easily used when executing the non-game program. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) required for the game program in the non-game RAM area. , The processing based on the non-game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-game RAM area and the data that the non-game program can refer to are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the main process, and FIG. 10B shows. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 10A, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area and performs a common call process. Execute 1. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area). Is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then the timer interrupt is set to prohibit by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating interrupt prohibition, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-game program at the address you are using.

On the other hand, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program is set based on the called non-game program, and the processing of the non-game program is executed. After that, it returns to the calling game program, that is, the common call processing 1.

After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the prohibition of timer interrupt by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating interrupt permission, and saves the game stack area and SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is set to be prohibited by the common call process 1, and when the non-game program returns to the game program, the interrupt is performed. Since the prohibition is lifted, the interruption can be set to be prohibited for the period during which the non-game program is being executed.

When the non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program first sets interrupts to be prohibited, executes various processes, and ends the non-game program. The prohibition of interrupts may be lifted, and with such a configuration, interrupts can be set to be prohibited during the period in which the non-game program is being executed, as in the present embodiment. Further, since the non-game program sets the prohibition and cancellation of interrupts, it is not necessary to set and cancel the prohibition of interrupts in the common call process 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. ..

As shown in FIG. 10B, when calling a non-game program from a timer interrupt process based on a game program, the game program sets the start address of the non-game program to be called in a specific area and is common. The call process 2 is executed. In the common call processing 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. Call the non-game program of the address set in the area of.

On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the processing of the non-game program, and then returns to the common call processing 2 of the caller.

After returning to the common call process 2, the common call process 2 changes the stack pointer of the register and the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and finish.

As described above, unlike the call common process 1, the common call process 2 does not set or cancel the timer interrupt, but as described above, the main control unit 41 performs other interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Since the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited, the interrupt can be prohibited for the period during which the non-game program is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program, the register actually used by the game program is used. Since the process of saving and protecting all the areas of the register is performed regardless of the presence or absence, when returning to the game program, it is possible to surely return from the state at the time when the non-game program was called. ..

The non-game program protects the value of the register used by the game program immediately before calling the non-game program from the process based on the game program in the game program without executing the common call process 1 and the common call process 2. After all the processing based on the above is completed, the value of the register protected at the first stage of returning to the game program may be restored. With such a configuration, the register may be restored before the non-game program is called. Since the protection process is performed and the register is restored after returning from the non-game program, the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

Further, when the non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program, and the stack pointer and the register of the game program are restored at the end of the non-game program. Also, with such a configuration, when returning to the game program, it is possible to surely return from the state at the time when the non-game program was called, and also to return to the game program. The capacity can be reduced.

Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the initial setting process executed by the main control unit 41 at startup will be described. When the main control unit 41 is activated due to the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 sets at startup. In the startup setting, the status flag provided in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result and the execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes the interrupt master permission flag that sets the prohibition / permission of interrupt. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating the prohibition of interrupts, the main control unit 41 is started in a state where interrupts are prohibited. After that, the main control unit 41 sets various functions with reference to the HW parameters, and then performs the initial setting process according to the program stored in the program / data area. In this embodiment, the initial setting process is included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the initial setting process, interrupting is prohibited by first setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating interrupt prohibition (Sa1). As described above, the main control unit 41 is activated in the interrupt-prohibited state, but in Sa1, interrupts are prohibited again. Next, initialization data is set (Sa2), and each output port including the parallel output port 513 is initialized (Sa3). Next, the built-in register is set (Sa4).

Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply voltage is normal (Sa5). If the power supply voltage is not normal, the determination is repeated until it becomes normal. If the power supply voltage is normal, the upper address of the interrupt vector is set (Sa6). Then, the access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa7), and the stack pointer is initialized (Sa8).

Next, the RAM parity of the game RAM area (the area of F000H to F1FFH including the game stack area and the unused area 3) in the usable area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa9). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated RAM parity is 0 (Sa10). As will be described later, if the power interruption process (main) is normally performed when the power is cut off last time, the RAM parity should be 0. Therefore, if the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sd10, the game of RAM 41c The data stored in the RAM area is not normal, and in this case, the process proceeds to the Sa13 step and the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa13). On the other hand, when the RAM parity becomes 0, the destruction diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area is further acquired (Sa11), and it is determined whether or not the acquired destruction diagnosis data is correct (Sa12). Clear the destructive diagnosis data (Sa13).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Sa14). When the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, the timer interrupt is set (Sa19). Specifically, the register of the timer circuit 509 built in the main control unit 41 is set so that the timer interrupt is executed periodically at predetermined time intervals. In this embodiment, the value corresponding to about 0.56 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register), so that the timer interrupt is periodically generated every about 0.56 ms. Further, in the timer circuit 509, the timer is initialized by setting the register, and the time counting is started from the initial value. When the timer interrupt setting in the step of Sa19 is completed, the process shifts to the setting change process.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state, it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed (Sa15). In the step of Sa15, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag described later is set, and whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed based on the determinations of Sa10 and Sa12. If the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed, a return command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (Sa16). When the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed, it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not set and the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Sa10, and the destruction diagnosis data is further stored in the step of Sa12. This is the case when it is determined to be correct.

After the step of Sa16, all the registers are restored based on the data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sa17), and the timer interrupt setting similar to the step of Sa19 is set (Sa18). Then, the process shifts to the Sd24 process of the timer interrupt process (main) described later. As a result, the state of the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c before the power failure and the processing executed before the power failure are restored.

If the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the step of Sa15, a RAM abnormality flag indicating that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not normal is set in the RAM 41c (Sa20), and the process proceeds to error processing. In error handling, the progress of the game is disabled. Further, in the error state in which the RAM abnormality flag is set and the transition is made, the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power switch 39 is turned on, so that the error state can be canceled by shifting to the setting change processing. On the other hand, when the power switch 39 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 37, the RAM error flag is still set, and it is determined that the RAM is destroyed in the step of Sa15. It becomes an error state again.

Next, the setting change process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In this embodiment, the setting change process is included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 41 first sets the start address of the RAM 41c, that is, the start address (F000H) of the usable area in the register (Sb1). Next, it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the same manner as in the step of Sa15 shown in FIG. 11 (Sb2). If the contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed, that is, if the contents of the RAM are not abnormal, the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the start of the setting change (the final address of the available area in which the important work is stored). (Next address) is set in the register (Sb3). That is, the address set in Sb1 is changed. If the contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, that is, if the contents of the RAM are abnormal, the process proceeds to step Sb4.

Next, the final address (F1FFH) of the game stack area (in use) is specified as the final address of the RAM to be initialized (Sb4), the game area initialization process is executed, and the address specified in the step of Sb1 or Sb3 is used. The area up to the final address of the initialization target RAM is initialized (Sb5). Since the start address (F000H) of the usable area is set in the step of Sb1, if the RAM contents are abnormal, all the areas of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c are initialized in the step of Sb5. It becomes. On the other hand, in the step of Sb3, as the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the start of setting change, the address next to the final address of the area in which the special work is stored in the usable area is set, so that the RAM contents are set. If it is not abnormal, the area other than the special work in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized in the step of Sb5.

After that, the non-game area initialization process described later is executed to initialize the area from the start address of the unused area 4 to the final address of the non-game stack area (in use), that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area. (Sb6).

Next, a setting command (start) indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 (Sb7) to allow interruption (Sb8).

Next, it is determined whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 has changed from OFF to ON (Sb9). When the reset / setting switch 38 changes from OFF to ON, the set value of the register is updated (1 is added in the case of 1 to 5 and updated to 1 in the case of 6) (Sb10). If the reset / setting switch 38 does not change, it is determined whether or not the start switch 7 has changed from OFF to ON (Sb11). If the start switch 7 does not change, the process returns to the step of Sb7. On the other hand, when the start switch 7 changes from OFF to ON, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state (Sb12). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the OFF state, it waits until the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state. When the setting key switch 37 is in the OFF state, the data of the set value set in the register is stored in the special work of the RAM 41c (Sb13).

Next, a setting command (end) indicating the end of the setting change state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 (Sb14). Then, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the setting change (the address next to the final address of the area in which the special work is stored in the usable area) is set in the register (Sb14), and the process proceeds to the main process. ..

Next, the game area initialization process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In this embodiment, the game area initialization process is included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 41 acquires the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM set in the register (Sf1). Then, the start address value is subtracted from the end address value of the initialization target RAM to calculate the capacity of the initialization target RAM (Sf2), and the calculated capacity of the initialization target RAM is set in the register (Sf3). Further, the start address value of the initialization target RAM is set as a designated address (Sf4), and the 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 to clear it (Sf5). After that, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0 (Sf6). If the calculation result is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sf5 and the 1-byte data is again obtained. Is overwritten with 0 to clear. Then, when it is determined that the calculation result is 0 in the step of Sf6, the designated address is updated to the address next to the address currently set as the designated address (Sf7), and the register is subtracted by 1. (Sf8), it is determined whether or not the register is 0 (Sf9).

If it is determined in the step of Sf9 that the register is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sf5, and the processing of the steps Sf5 to Sf9 is repeated until the register becomes 0. If it is determined in the step of Sf9 that the register is 0, the game area initialization process is terminated and the program returns to the calling program.

As described above, in the game area initialization process of the present embodiment, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated by designating the start address and the end address of the initialization target RAM, and the start address of the initialization target RAM is calculated. By sequentially clearing the area corresponding to the capacity of the initialization target RAM, the area of the designated initialization target RAM in the game RAM area is initialized.

In the game area initialization process of this embodiment, by designating the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated based on the start address and end address, and the start address is calculated. By setting the address as the initial value of the specified address and repeating the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address, as many times as the capacity of the initialization target RAM, the beginning of the initialization target RAM The area from the address to the end address is initialized, but by specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the data of the specified address is used. By repeatedly executing the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing until the specified address becomes the end address, the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM is initialized. Is also good.

Next, the non-gaming area initialization process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In this embodiment, the non-game area initialization process is included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 14, the main control unit 41 sets the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM (Sg1). Then, the start address value of the initialization target RAM (the start address value of the unused area 4) was subtracted from the final address value of the usable area of the RAM 41c to calculate the capacity of the initialization target RAM (Sg2). The capacity of the RAM to be initialized is set in the register (Sg3). Further, the start address value of the initialization target RAM (the start address value of the unused area 4) is set as the designated address (Sg4), and the 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 to clear the data. (Sg5). After that, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0 (Sf6). If the calculation result is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sg5 and the 1-byte data is again obtained. Is overwritten with 0 to clear. Then, when it is determined that the calculation result is 0 in the step of Sg6, the designated address is updated to the address next to the address currently set as the designated address (Sg7), and the register is subtracted by 1. (Sg8), it is determined whether or not the register is 0 (Sg9).

If it is determined in the step of Sg9 that the register is not 0, the process returns to the step of Sg5, and the processing of the steps Sg5 to Sg9 is repeated until the register becomes 0. If it is determined in the step of Sg9 that the register is 0, the non-game area initialization process is terminated and the program returns to the calling program.

As described above, in the non-gaming area initialization process of the present embodiment, the RAM area corresponding to the capacity of the initialization target RAM is sequentially cleared from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4). The area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-gaming RAM area are initialized.

In the non-gaming area initialization process of this embodiment, by designating the start address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated based on the start address, and the start address is set to the designated address. The process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address as the initial value is repeatedly executed as many times as the capacity of the initialization target RAM, from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM. By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the specified address is cleared after the data of the specified address is cleared. May be configured to initialize the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM by repeatedly executing the process of updating to the next address until the designated address becomes the end address.

Further, in the non-gaming area initialization process of the present embodiment, by setting the start address of the unused area 4 as the start address of the initialization target RAM, all the areas of the unused area 4 and the non-game area RAM area are initialized. However, the non-game area initialization process may be performed as long as at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, and a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized. However, a part of the non-gaming RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area initialization process and the non-game area initialization process, the 1-byte data stored in the designated address is overwritten with 0 to clear the data, and then the logic of the 1-byte data is performed. The sum is calculated to determine whether or not the calculation result is 0 (Sf6), and if the calculation result is not 0, the 1-byte data is overwritten with 0 and cleared. The configuration is such that the data of the address to be cleared is cleared, but the configuration may be such that the 1-byte data stored in the specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared.

Next, the main process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. Then, one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of the game. In this embodiment, the main process is included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 15, the main control unit 41 first prohibits interruption (Sc1). Next, the final address of the initialization target RAM (the final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set (Sc2).

Next, the game area initialization process is executed to clear the area of the RAM 41c indicated by the designated address (Sc3). At this time, if the main process is started after the setting change process, the area in which the special work is stored as the start address of the initialization target RAM when the setting change process is completed. The address next to the final address of is set, and in Sc2 of the main process, the final address of the game stack area (unused) is set as the final address of the initialization target RAM. Therefore, a special work in the game RAM area is set. And the area other than the game stack area (in use) (important work, general work, unused area 3, stack area (unused)) will be initialized. Further, at the end of a game that is not in a specific game state, the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the game (the start address of the unused area 3) is set in the Sc10 step described later, and the initialization is performed in the Sc2 step. Since the final address of the target RAM (the final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) of the usable areas are initialized. Further, at the end of the specific game state and at the end of the game, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific game state (a special work in the game RAM area is stored) in the step of Sc11 described later. The final address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the specific game state (the final address of the game stack area (unused)) is set in the Sc2 step. Therefore, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized.

After the RAM is initialized in the step of Sc3, the interrupt is permitted (Sc4), and the game start waiting process is executed (Sc5). In the game start waiting process, a process of waiting in a state in which the bet number can be set, setting a predetermined number of bets according to the game state, and starting the game when the start switch 7 is operated is executed.

Next, the internal lottery process is executed (Sc6). In the internal lottery process, whether to allow the above-mentioned winning of each winning combination based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched at the same time as the game starts by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sc5 (that is, the derivation of the display result is derived. Performs the process of deciding whether or not to allow it.

Next, the reel control process is executed (Sc7). In the reel control process, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the start switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step of Sd2, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player are detected. A process of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is executed according to the fact.

Next, the game end setting process is executed (Sc8). In the game end setting process, when it is determined that the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has stopped in the Sc7 process, a prize is generated according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. Execute the process of determining whether or not. Then, when it is determined that a prize has been generated, credits are added and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts according to the prize. When a prize is won, a process of setting the game state is executed in preparation for the next game after the payout of medals is completed. Further, if no winning is generated, after the reels are stopped, a process of setting the game state is executed in preparation for the next game.

When the game end time setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not it is the end of a specific game state (Sc9), and if it is not the end of the specific game state, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the game is set. Set (Sc10) and return to the step of Sc1. If it is the end of the specific gaming state, the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the specific gaming state is set (Sc11), and the process returns to the Sc1 step.

In the main process, a command storage process that generates a command and sets it in the command queue is executed according to the progress of the game, and the set command is executed in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main) during normal operation. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the command transmission process.

16 and 17 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 interrupting the main process (mainly the main process) at regular intervals (intervals of about 0.56 ms). is there. The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509, and the address in which the timer interrupt process (main) program is stored is a vector table. It is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt of. Then, when the timer interrupt occurs, the process from the address is executed. In addition, other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, the register in use is saved in the game stack area (Sd1).

Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sd2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage decrease signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit 48, and if the voltage decrease signal has been input, whether or not the voltage decrease signal has been input even in the previous power failure determination process. If a voltage drop signal is input even in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that there is a power failure, and a power failure flag indicating that is set.

After the power failure determination process in the step of Sd2, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (Sd3), and if the power failure flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sd4 and the detection data of various switches from the input port. Performs port input processing to input. On the other hand, when the power failure flag is set in the step of Sd3, all the untransmitted commands set in the command queue are sent to the sub control unit 91 by executing the command transmission process at the time of power failure. After transmission (Sd25), the process proceeds to the power interruption process (main).

Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sd5). In the step of Sd5, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and the value is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0 ... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

Next, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 by referring to the branch counter value (Sd6), and if it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt. In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data of the reel motors 32C, 32C, 32R is executed (Sd7).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is 1 by referring to the branch counter value, that is, whether or not it is timer interrupt 2 (Sd8), and if it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, if it is timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel start processing (Sd9) that controls the step time interval at the start of 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sd10) that changes the phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C , 32R is stopped, and after a certain period of time has elapsed, the motor phase signal standby process (Sd11) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation is sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to the step of Sd24.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Sd8 that the timer interrupt is 2, the normal command transmission process (Sd12) for transmitting various commands set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91, and the door open detection switch 25 Door monitoring process (Sd13) for monitoring the detection status, requesting transmission of door commands, etc., external output signal update process (Sd14) for updating the external output signal, LED dynamic display process (Sd15) for dynamically lighting various indicators, After sequentially executing the control signal output process (Sd16) for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port and the time counter update process (Sd17) for updating various time counters, the process proceeds to the step of Sd24.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Sd6 that the timer interrupt is 3 or the timer interrupt 4, it is further determined whether or not the branching counter value is 3, that is, whether or not the timer interrupt is 4 (Sd18). If it is not the timer interrupt 4, that is, if it is the timer interrupt 3, the origin passage process (Sd19) for checking the origin passage (passage of the reel reference position) of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the switches After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sd20) for determining whether or not the detection state has changed, the process proceeds to the step of Sd24.

Further, when it is determined in the step of Sd18 that the timer interrupt is 4, the stop switch process (Sd21) for determining the stop position according to the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the two-phase when it is time to stop. After sequentially executing the stop process (Sd22) for starting the brake by excitation and the final stop process (Sd23) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of the brake in the stop process, the process proceeds to the step of Sd24.

In the step of Sd24, the register saved in the game stack area in Sd1 is restored, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is included in the game program, while the power failure determination process, the command transmission process at the time of power failure, the command transmission process during normal operation, and the door open monitoring process are included in the non-game program. As described above, the main control unit 41 sets interrupt prohibition in the timer interrupt process (main), saves the stack pointers and registers of the game programs, and then calls these non-game programs. It has become like. Further, when the timer interrupt processing (main) is returned from these non-game programs, the stack pointer and the register of the game program are returned to the state before the non-game program is called, and then the subsequent processing is performed. It is supposed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, the main control unit 41 executes the subsequent process in the interrupt prohibited state even after returning from the non-game program. To do.

In addition, the non-gaming program that is executed in the timer interrupt process (main), such as power failure determination process, power failure command transmission process, normal command transmission process, and door open monitoring process, must be executed before these non-game programs. Processes other than certain processes (for example, port input process that needs to be executed before branching of timer interrupt, motor phase signal output process), that is, control effects whether performed before or after the non-game program It is designed to be executed before the processing without.

Next, the power interruption process executed by the main control unit 41 will be described.

FIG. 18 shows the power interruption process (main) executed after the power interruption command transmission process when the main control unit 41 determines that the power interruption flag is set in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. It is a flowchart which shows the control content. In this embodiment, the power interruption process is included in the game program.

In the power failure process (main), the main control unit 41 first saves all the registers that may be used in the stack area (Se1).

Next, all output ports including the parallel output port 513 that outputs commands are initialized (Se2). As a result, the output state of the output port corresponding to the last output command by the command transmission process at the time of power failure is initialized. Then, the destruction diagnosis data is set in the game RAM area (Se2). The destruction diagnosis data is 5A (H), that is, a value containing 1 in any bit. Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set in the game RAM area so that the exclusive OR of all areas (including the unused area 3) of the game RAM area becomes 0, and all the game stack areas are set. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set in the game RAM area so that the exclusive OR of the areas (unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use)) becomes 0 ( Se4), prohibiting access to the RAM 41c (Se5). After that, the voltage drops, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 stops, and the state shifts to the standby state. Then, when the voltage drops in this standby state, the main control unit 41 is internally stopped in operation, and the operation is surely stopped in the event of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the adjustment data is set in the target area so that the calculation result of the target area in the power interruption process becomes a specific value (0 in this embodiment), and the target area is set in the start-up process. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal is determined by whether or not the calculation result of the area is a specific value. However, the calculation result of the target area in the power failure process and the target area in the start-up process are determined. It may be configured to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal depending on whether or not the calculation result of the above matches. Further, the calculation method is not limited to the exclusive OR, and other calculation methods (for example, total sum) may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data 1 is calculated using the data stored in all the areas of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the power interruption processing, and the unused area 3 is used in the startup processing. Whether or not the RAM 41c is normal is determined based on the RAM parity calculated using the data stored in all the areas of the game RAM area including the game RAM area, and an invalid program is stored in the unused area 3. In this case, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, so that it is possible to prevent an invalid program from being stored in the unused area 3.

In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated using the data stored in all the areas of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the power interruption process, and the unused area 3 is included in the start-up process. The configuration is such that whether or not the RAM 41c is normal is determined based on the RAM parity calculated using the data stored in all the areas of the game RAM area, but the RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 is adjusted. Data is calculated and set in the game RAM area, and RAM parity adjustment data in the non-game RAM area is calculated and set in the non-game RAM area, and stored in the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the startup process. It may be configured to determine whether or not the RAM 41c is normal based on the RAM parity calculated using the calculated data and the RAM parity calculated using the data stored in the non-gaming RAM area. In such a configuration, if an invalid program is stored in the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Therefore, the invalid program is stored in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area. Can be prevented from being memorized.

As described above, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is started in the interrupt-prohibited state when a reset occurs, and is interrupted by the program at the start of the initial setting process to be executed for the first time thereafter. The prohibition is performed, and even if the main control unit 41 is activated in a state where the interrupt is not prohibited for some reason, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt from occurring.

Further, after the main control unit 41 is activated, after setting the timer interrupt in the timer circuit 509, the interrupt is permitted, and the interrupt occurs in a state where the timer interrupt does not operate normally. It can be prevented from being interrupted. Further, in the timer circuit 509, the timer is initialized by setting the timer interrupt, and the time counting is started from the initial value, and the time from the start until the first interrupt occurs. The timer interrupt can be generated at regular time intervals without any deviation from the time until the second and subsequent interrupts occur. Further, the main control unit 41 updates the setting of the timer circuit 509 to the initial value by the program in the initial setting process, and the setting of the timer circuit 509 is rewritten for some reason at the time of startup. Even if there is, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

Further, if the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state at the time of activation, the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting change processing, and initializes the RAM 41c at the start of the setting change processing. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the special work is held and the other usable areas, that is, the game RAM area excluding the special work, the unused area 3, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. Even after changing the setting, a part of the control state (set value, game state, etc.) before the change can be retained, but if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, all areas of the usable area are initialized. As a result, the abnormality in the data of the RAM 41c can be surely eliminated.

Further, since the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main control unit 41 when the RAM abnormality is determined, the RAM parity is 0 when the power is turned off again after the RAM abnormality error occurs and the power is turned on again. Therefore, even when the destruction diagnosis data is determined to be normal, it is possible to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed based on the RAM abnormality flag.

Further, after the setting change processing is completed, the main control unit 41 executes a main process for stepwise processing according to the progress of the game for each game unit. Further, in the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change process is completed, the main process is started from the stage before the process of initializing the RAM 41c in the main process, and the initialization of the RAM 41c after the setting change process is completed and the game unit. It is possible to initialize the RAM 41c for each unit by a common process.

Further, when the RAM 41c is initialized, the main control unit 41 prohibits interrupts until the initialization is completed, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed during the execution of the initialization of the RAM 41c. When it occurs, it is possible to prevent the initialized contents from being changed or the processing performed in the timer interrupt processing (main) from being performed normally.

Further, the main control unit 41 updates the output state of the external output signal in the main process, and changes the output state of the external output signal in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main) based on the updated output state. At the same time, when updating the output status of the external output signal, interrupting is prohibited until the update is completed, and the timer interrupt processing (main) occurs before the output status of the external output signal is completed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an external output signal indicating unintended data from being output.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In addition to executing the main process based on the program, it is possible to interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program, and the timer interrupt process can also be executed from the main process. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to the timer interrupt processing (main) being executed while the non-game program is being executed.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, and it is also possible to interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals and execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program, and also from the main process. , In a configuration in which the non-game program can be called and executed from the timer interrupt process (main), when the non-game program is called from the main process, after setting the interruption of other processes to prohibit, the relevant processing is performed. While calling the non-game program, when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main), that is, when calling the non-game program in a situation where further interruption is unlikely to occur, interrupt other processes. Since the non-game program is called without being set to prohibit, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interruption while preventing malfunction due to execution of interruption during execution of the non-game program. ..

The timer interrupt processing (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes processing by a game program, for example, LED dynamic display processing, control signal output processing, etc., and processing by a non-game program, for example, normal time. It is composed of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process and a command transmission process at the time of power interruption, and among a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main), a process by a predetermined game program. In particular, since the non-game program is called before the process that can be executed before or after these non-game programs, that is, a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main). Since the non-game program is called at the earliest possible stage, for example, even if the next timer interrupt occurs and double interrupt occurs without the timer interrupt process (main) being completed for some reason. , It is possible to prevent other interrupts from being executed during the execution of a non-game program.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute the game program and the non-game program, and has a game stack area for saving data used by the game program and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program. , Is provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack area separately provided, so that the stack area Is easy to manage. In particular, the data used by the game program saved due to the occurrence of the timer interrupt and the data used by the non-game program performed during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) are mixed and stored in one stack area. Since there is no such thing, stack management is not complicated.

When executing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment saves the register value used in the game program to the game stack area, calls the non-game program, and performs processing in the non-game program. When the processing in the non-game program is completed, the saved register value is restored, so that the register value used by the game program is prevented from being changed as the non-game program is executed. it can.

Further, when calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program, the call common process 1 or the call common process 2 for saving the value of the register used in the game program to the game stack area is called, and the main By standardizing the program for executing the non-game program in the process, the program capacity can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the main process, the call common process 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process. At this time, the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1 is executed to save the value of the register used in the game program to the game stack area. However, the main process is based on the game program. A common call common process may be executed both when the non-game program is called from and when the non-game program is called from the process based on the game program in the timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed from both the main process and the timer interrupt process (main), and the non-game program can be executed from the main process. When calling, interrupt of other processing is set to prohibit and the non-game program is called, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt processing (main), interrupt of other processing is set to prohibit. Although it is configured to call the non-game program without using it, the main control unit 41 may call the non-game program from the main process or the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). It may be configured to prohibit interruption of the processing of.

Specifically, when the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program from a process based on the game program during the execution of the main process, the main control unit 41 executes the call common process 1 as in the present embodiment, while interrupting the timer. When calling a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the process, as shown in FIG. 23, in the game program, the start address of the non-game program to be called is set in the register, and the call common process is performed. Execute 3. The call common process 3 is a process included in the game program as in the call common process 1. In the call common process 3, the register of the game program is saved in the game RAM area, and the stack pointer (SP, game stack area) is saved. (Address indicating the current position of) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then the value of the interrupt master permission flag is set to a value indicating interrupt prohibition to prohibit interrupt interrupt. After that, the non-game program of the address set in the register is called.

On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program, executes the processing of the non-game program, and then executes the process. It returns to the game program of the caller, that is, the call common process 3. After returning to the call common process 3, the call common process 3 sets the stack pointer of the register and the game program, and the non-game program, based on the data saved in the game RAM area, as in the call common process 2. It returns to the state before calling and ends. That is, in the call common process 3, the interrupt prohibition is maintained even after the end of the non-game program without setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag after the process of the non-game program is completed.

In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when calling a non-game program from the main process but also when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the interruption being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

In particular, when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and the interrupt prohibition is canceled at the end of the timer interrupt process (main), so that the timer interrupt process (main) Interruption of other processing is prohibited during execution, but even in this case, interrupting of other processing is prohibited again when calling a non-game program from the timer interrupt processing (main), so something Even if the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to the cause, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the interrupt being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

Further, as described above, the interrupt prohibition is set when the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and the interrupt prohibition is released at the end of the timer interrupt process (main). The configuration is such that interrupts of other processes are prohibited during execution of (main), but when interrupting other processes is prohibited again when calling a non-game program from timer interrupt processes (main). By maintaining the setting for prohibiting interrupts of other processes set when the non-game program is called even after the non-game program ends, the non-game interrupt process (main) is being executed. It is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being lifted by executing the program.

Next, the initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 is performed to initialize all the usable areas.

Further, when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are not destroyed at the start of the setting change process, the area of the game RAM area excluding the special work, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 is performed to initialize an area other than the special work among the usable areas.

Further, at the end of the setting change process, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Perform initialization 2 to initialize areas other than (in use).

Further, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, initialization 3 is performed to initialize the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area.

Further, at the end of one game, which is not the end of a specific game state, the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area is performed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs initialization 0 to 4 when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition, of the usable area of the RAM 41c. When at least a part of the game RAM area in which the data used by the game program is stored is initialized and the second condition is satisfied as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and the usable area of the RAM 41c Initialize at least a part of the non-gaming RAM area used by the non-gaming program.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, as the first condition, at the end of one game, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas. Is initialized, but the non-gaming RAM area of the usable area is not initialized. Further, as the first condition, at the end of the specific game state, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, are initialized, but are used. Of the possible areas, the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized. Further, as the first condition, after the setting change state is completed, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, are initialized. However, the non-gaming RAM area of the usable area is not initialized.

On the other hand, as a second condition, if there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, which is a part of the game RAM area among the usable areas, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized. If there is an abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, all the areas of the game RAM area among the usable areas are initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area are initialized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, and is capable of executing the game program and the non-game. It is equipped with a ROM 41d for storing a program.

In such a configuration, if a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41d, it is difficult to determine which program is the program related to the progress of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ROM 41d includes a game program area in which the game program is stored and a non-game program area in which the non-game program is stored, and the game program area and the non-game program. Since the area and the area are assigned separately, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is used as a work of a game program and stores a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a game RAM area used as a work of a non-game program and stores data used by the non-game program. A non-game RAM area and a RAM 41c including the non-game RAM area are provided, and since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are used. The data can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and the first When the initialization condition of 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized, and at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, so that the data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c Of the data used by the non-game program, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

As the first initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, when one game is completed. As the first initialization condition, when the special game state (BB) is finished and one game is finished, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack, which are a part of the game RAM area, are finished. When the area (unused) is initialized and the setting change is completed and the main process is started as the first initialization condition, the important work area, the general work area, and the unused area that are a part of the game RAM area are not used. Since the used area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

Further, as a second initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has an important work, a general work, and an unused area which are a part of the game RAM area when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change. 3. Initialize the game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (in use), and of the non-game RAM areas, the area referenced by the game program, the area not referenced by the game program, and the non-game stack area ( (Unused) and non-game stack area (in use), that is, all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized, and as a second initialization condition, when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, the game RAM area Of these, special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), that is, all areas of the game RAM area are initialized, and the non-game RAM area is initialized. Of these, to initialize all areas of the area referenced by the game program, the area not referenced by the game program, the non-game stack area (unused) and the non-game stack area (in use), that is, the non-game RAM area. , Data used by the gaming program stored in the RAM 41c and data used by the non-gaming program, which are appropriate depending on the situation can be initialized.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a part of the game RAM area is initialized when the first initialization condition is satisfied, but the main control unit 41 is the first. When the initialization condition is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area may be initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area may be initialized.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and all areas of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Any area may be used, and all areas of the game RAM area may be initialized, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area may be initialized. It may be the one that initializes all the areas of both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area.

Since the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment configures the program for initializing the game RAM area and the program for initializing the non-game RAM area as separate programs, the game program is a non-game RAM area. Since there is no need to initialize, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Further, a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program. Therefore, the game program initializes the non-game RAM area, or the non-game program performs the game RAM. It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

As the first initialization condition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game end processing setting in the main processing, and then determines that it is not the end of a specific game state, that is, the end of one game. By setting the start address of the RAM to be initialized at the end of the game and executing the game area initialization process, a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized, so that the game progresses for each game unit. A part of the unnecessary game RAM area can be initialized.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is activated with the setting key switch 37 turned on, and when the setting change process is started, that is, the second initialization condition is satisfied based on the setting change operation being performed. At that time, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization process is executed to initialize the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. It is possible to initialize both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area based on the setting change operation (initialization operation) of the game clerk.

The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on the game program or when performing control based on the non-game program, and includes the first initialization condition. Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when the above is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area 3.

In this embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the unused area 3 is initialized when any one of the conditions is satisfied when the second initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area 3. Further, if the first initialization condition is a configuration including a plurality of conditions, and if the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, invalid data is stored in the unused area 3. It can be prevented from being done. The same applies even if the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is used as a work of a game program and is used as a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game RAM area is used as a work of a non-game program and stores data used by the non-game program. A RAM 41c including a game RAM area is provided, and the RAM 41c has a configuration capable of holding data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by the backup power supply, and is a main. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control unit 41 starts the initial setting process, and whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply. If it is determined to be normal, the control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM 41c.

In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. When determining whether or not, the load when resuming control based on the data stored in the RAM 41c becomes excessive.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, and the RAM of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply It is determined whether or not the stored contents of the RAM are normal based on the parity and the destruction diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game Control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area that does not hinder the progress of the game is normal or not. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load when resuming the control while ensuring that the game can proceed normally.

The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used both when performing control based on the game program and when performing control based on the non-game program, and includes the main control. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the unit 41 executes the initial setting process, calculates the RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the initial setting process, and calculates the RAM. Since it is determined whether or not the stored contents of the game RAM area are normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored in the unused area 3.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and determines whether or not the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed in the initial setting process. , When it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM error flag is set to control the error processing, and then the error state is maintained without automatically recovering, while the setting key switch 36 When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started while is ON, the setting change process is controlled, the game area initialization process is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area is initialized. Since the processing is executed to initialize the non-game RAM area, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is cleared, either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in the crab.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets a RAM abnormality flag when it is determined in the initial setting process that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. After that, with the setting key switch 36 turned on, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and the setting change processing is executed, so that the game is played as the error state is released. Although both the RAM area and the non-gaming RAM area are initialized, the main control unit 41 destroys the stored contents of the RAM 41c in the initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. When it is determined that the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are both initialized, the error processing may be controlled. In such a configuration, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error processing is controlled. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area is abnormal. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of. Further, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized both when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed and when the setting change process is subsequently executed. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the power interruption process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power supply voltage drop is detected by the power interruption detection circuit 48. In the power interruption processing, the RAM 41c By prohibiting access to, access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited, so the non-game RAM area that is not subject to judgment as to whether or not the data is destroyed at the next startup is used. This can prevent unauthorized data from being stored.

Next, a timer counter for measuring the time interval used by the main control unit 41 for controlling the progress of the game and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22.

When the timekeeping start condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 sets an initial value according to the timekeeping time as a timer value of the timer counter assigned to the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and in the timer interrupt processing (main). The timer value is periodically subtracted, and when the timer value becomes 0, it is specified that the time has passed.

Specifically, when the timekeeping start condition is satisfied in the main process, the main control unit 41 sets the initial value of the timer value according to the timekeeping time in the area to which the timer counter corresponding to the condition is assigned. The set timer value is subtracted by 1 in the time counter update process of the timer interrupt process (main) until it becomes 0 about every 2.24 ms.

Then, in the main process, as shown in FIG. 20, the address of the corresponding timer counter is acquired (Si1), the acquired value is read (Si2), and it is determined whether or not the read value is not 0 (Si3). , When it is determined that the read value is 0, it is specified that the time counting time has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 21, the timer counter used in this embodiment has an initial value of 1 byte or less, 1 byte timer A, 1 byte timer B, 1 byte timer C, and an initial value of more than 1 byte and 2 bytes or less. Includes 2-byte timer A, 2-byte timer B, 2-byte timer C, and 2-byte timer D.

The 1-byte timer is a timer for measuring a relatively short period that can be measured with a timer value of 1 byte or less. For example, an external output signal timer that measures the output period of an external output signal and an LED output update period. LED update timer to measure, stop invalid timer to measure the period from detection of stop operation until the stop operation is activated again, payout waiting to measure the period from reel stop to the start of medal payout The timer, the insertion detection timer that measures the period after the ON of the insertion medal sensor 31 is detected, the insertion port detection timer that measures the period after the ON of the insertion port sensor 26 is detected, and the ON of the payout sensor 34c are detected. There are a payout detection timer that measures the period after the start of rotation, a start timer that measures the period from the start of reel rotation until the stop operation becomes effective, and the like. Of these, the stop invalid timer, the payout wait timer, and the start timer do not span the timing at which one game ends in the measurement period by these timers, but the external output signal timer, LED update timer, input detection timer, and input port The detection timer and the payout detection timer may have a measurement time by these timers that spans the timing at which one game ends.

The 2-byte timer is a timer for measuring a relatively long period that cannot be measured with a timer value of 1 byte or less. For example, a 1-game time timer that measures a specified time (about 4.1 seconds) required for 1 game. , A security signal timer that measures the minimum output period of the security signal among the external output signals, a standby time timer that measures the period from the end of the game, and a hopper empty that measures the period during which the payout sensor 34c is not detected after the hopper motor 34b is driven. There is a timer and so on. Of these, the standby time timer and the hopper empty timer do not straddle the timing at which the measurement period by these timers ends for one game, but the one game time timer and the security signal timer have the measurement time by these timers for one game. May straddle the end timing of.

In this way, the timer counter is a timing at which one game ends, that is, a timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game (a part of the RAM 41c at the end of one game or at the end of a specific game state). A timer counter that measures the measurement period that straddles the timing at which is initialized) and a timer counter that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game. The counter is also assigned to a special work that is not initialized at the timing according to the progress of the game.

Of these timer counters, the 1-byte timers A to C are allocated 1 byte each to the continuous 3-byte area (804CH to 804EH) of the RAM 41c, and the 2-byte timers A to D are the continuous 8-byte areas of the RAM 41c. Two bytes are allocated to each region (804FH to 8055h). Further, the 1-byte timers A to C and the 2-byte timers A to D are also assigned to the continuous area of the RAM 41c. Hereinafter, the area to which the 1-byte timers A to C are allocated is referred to as a 1-byte timer group, and the area to which the 2-byte timers A to D are allocated is referred to as a 2-byte timer group. That is, both the 1-byte timer group and the 2-byte timer group are set in the area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule. The area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule is, for example, an area to which an address to be added by N (N is a natural number) from the start address and the start address is assigned.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the time counter update process.

In the time counter update process, first, the number of 1-byte timer counters to be updated (3 in this embodiment) is set as the number of 1-byte processes (Sj1), and the start address (804CH) of the 1-byte timer group is set. Set the pointer (Sj2).

Next, if the 1-byte value stored in the specified address (address indicated by the pointer) is not 0, the 1-byte value of the specified address is subtracted by 1 (Sj3), and the number of processes set in the step of Sj1 is subtracted by 1. (Sj4), it is determined whether or not the number of processes after subtraction is 0 (Sj5).

If the number of processes after subtraction is not 0 in the step of Sj5, that is, if the update of all 1-byte timers is not completed, the pointer is added by 1 (Sj6), and the process returns to the step of Sj3. As a result, the pointer moves to the address of the unprocessed 1-byte timer, and if the 1-byte value of the specified address is not 0, it is subtracted.

When the number of processes after subtraction is 0 in the step of Sj5, that is, when the update of all 1-byte timers is completed, the number of 2-byte timer counters to be updated is set as the number of 2-byte processes (this embodiment). Then, 4) is set (Sj7), and the pointer is added by 1 (Sj8). As a result, the pointer moves to the start address (804FH) of the 2-byte counter group.

Next, if the 2-byte value stored in the area consisting of the specified address (address indicated by the pointer) and the next address is not 0, the 2-byte value of the specified address and the next address is subtracted by 1 (Sj9), and Sj7. The number of processes set in step 1 is subtracted by 1 (Sj10), and it is determined whether or not the number of processes after the subtraction is 0 (Sj11).

If the number of processes after subtraction is not 0 in the step of Sj11, that is, if the update of all 2-byte timers is not completed, the pointer is added by 2 (Sj12), and the process returns to the step of Sj9. As a result, the pointer moves to the address of the unprocessed 2-byte timer, and if the 2-byte value of the specified address and the next address is not 0, the pointer is subtracted.

When the number of processes after subtraction is 0 in the step of Sj11, that is, when all the 2-byte timers have been updated, the processes are terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the timer counter assigned to the RAM 41c is periodically updated, and the passage of time is specified by becoming a specific value (0). Conventionally, when measuring multiple types of time intervals, timer values are set and updated within multiple types of processing that require timekeeping, and each process is a program for updating multiple types of timer values. Since it is necessary to provide it inside, it has been a factor of increasing the program capacity. In addition, since multiple types of timer counters are assigned as data groups for each process used, it is necessary to read the values of their unrelated addresses in order to update them collectively in one process. there were.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored is set in the area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c, and the timer values stored in the specified addresses are set. Since the update process is repeatedly executed while changing the specified address for the area where multiple types of timer counter values are stored by adding a constant to the current specified address, multiple types of timer values are updated. , The program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where a process of designating a plurality of types of addresses and updating the value of the address is performed in each process.

It should be noted that the process of updating the timer value stored in the specified address is repeatedly executed while changing the specified address for the area in which the timer counter values of multiple types are stored by performing a predetermined operation, thereby performing multiple types of timers. Any configuration may be used as long as the value is updated. For example, by adding a constant to the current specified address, multiple types of timer counter values can be repeatedly executed while changing the specified address for the area where the value is stored. The timer value may be updated, or a value corresponding to the number of processes with respect to the reference address (for example, in the case of a 1-byte counter, +1 for the number of processes 1 and +2 for the number of processes 2 and the number of processes). In the case of 3, +3 ...) may be added or subtracted to update the plurality of types of timer values by repeatedly executing while changing the designated address for the area in which the plurality of types of timer counter values are stored.

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration includes seven types of timer counter values of 1-byte timers A to C and 2-byte timers A to D, but at least two or more types of timer counter values are set according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c. The process of updating the timer value stored in the specified address by setting the area where consecutive addresses are assigned in is changed by performing a predetermined operation to change the specified address for the area where multiple types of timer values are stored. However, if the configuration is such that two or more types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing the timer values, the program capacity can be reduced as described above.

Further, for only one of the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer, the timer counter value is set in the area to which continuous addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c, and the timer value stored in the specified address is updated. It is also possible to update the plurality of types of timer values by repeatedly executing the area while changing the designated address for the area in which the plurality of types of timer values are stored by performing a predetermined operation.

Further, only a part of the timer counters provided in the main control unit 41 is set to the area to which continuous addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule of the RAM 41c, and the timer value stored in the designated address is updated. A configuration may be used in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing the operation while changing the designated address for the area in which the plurality of types of timer values are stored by performing a predetermined operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, a separate timer counter is provided for each type of measurement period, but for example, one timer counter may be shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap.

Further, in this embodiment, as the processes executed by the main control unit 41, a timer interrupt process (main) that periodically performs a predetermined process regardless of the progress status of the game, and a timer interrupt process (main) that periodically performs the process according to the progress status of the game. The main control unit 41 sets an initial value in the timer counter when a timing condition is satisfied in the main process, including a main process that performs different processes in stages, and a plurality of types in the timer interrupt process (main). Since the timer value is updated and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating multiple types of timer values in each process constituting the main process, the program capacity for updating multiple types of timer values is reduced. be able to.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by interrupting the main process periodically, but it is determined in advance in the timer interrupt process that is periodically performed regardless of the progress of the game. A configuration may be configured in which both the periodic processing for performing the processing and the main processing for performing different processing stepwise according to the progress of the game are performed. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 is the main. By setting the initial value in the timer counter when the timing condition is satisfied in the process and updating multiple types of timer values in the periodic process, multiple types of timer values can be set in each process that constitutes the main process. Since it is not necessary to provide a process for updating, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for updating a plurality of types of timer values.

Further, in this embodiment, in the time counter update process, the value of the specified address is updated on the condition that the value of the specified address is not 0, and the timer value is updated to an abnormal value. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the time counter update process, the same number of processes as the number of timer counters to be updated is set, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed for the set number of processes. In addition to facilitating the management of the number of timer counters to be updated, for example, when a plurality of types of timer counters having different update intervals are provided, the type of timer value to be updated can be arbitrarily set according to the number of processes to be set. it can.

The number of processes, that is, the number of timer counters to be updated may be set in the program, or the value set in the table may be read and set.

In addition, the timer counter to be updated last is set in advance without setting the number of processes first, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed until the address of the timer counter is reached, or the process is updated at the end. A specific end value (for example, FFh) is stored in the next address of the timer counter to be used, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed until the value read from the specified address reaches the specific end value. good.

Further, in this embodiment, a 1-byte timer counter and a 2-byte timer counter are provided, and a process of updating the 1-byte timer value and a process of updating the 2-byte timer value are separately provided. Therefore, the capacity of the program and the capacity occupied by the timer value in the RAM 41c can be reduced as compared with the case where the process of updating the 1-byte timer value and the process of updating the 2-byte timer value are shared.

In this embodiment, a 2-byte timer counter is provided to measure a relatively long time corresponding to an initial value exceeding 1 byte. For example, a timer counter having a different update interval, for example, a timer Interruption processing (main) By providing a first timer counter that updates once every four times and a second timer counter that updates once every 14 times, it is relative without providing a 2-byte counter. It may be configured to measure a long time interval, and by doing so, it is not necessary to provide a process of updating the 1-byte timer value and a process of updating the 2-byte timer value, so that the timer value does not need to be provided. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the update of.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned to a special work that is not initialized according to the progress of the game in the RAM 41c, and are not initialized according to the progress of the game. Regardless of the progress of the game, it is possible to measure the time of the period straddling the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, not only the timer counter whose measurement period may straddle the end timing of one game, that is, the timing when a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game, but also the measurement period is the game. Since the timer counter that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress is also stored in the area allocated to the special work together with the other timer counters, the timer counter can be easily managed. At the same time, a timer counter whose measurement period does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set, and the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game is set. The usage of the timer counter can be easily changed by a later design change such as changing to a timer counter that may straddle. Further, if one timer counter is shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap as described above, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized may be straddled according to the progress of the game. It is possible to measure the measurement period and the measurement period that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game with one timer counter.

FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams for explaining the game state to be drawn, the setting difference, the presence or absence of the AT lottery, and whether or not the winning combination is the target of the lottery in the internal lottery by the main control unit 41. is there. Further, FIG. 27 is for explaining the transition of the gaming state (RT1 to 4, inside, RB (including RB in BB1, RB in BB2, RB winning RB)) controlled by the main control unit 41. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, a combination of lottery target combinations read as lottery target combinations (including AT) for each game state in the internal lottery will be described.

In this embodiment, as the lottery target roles to be the target of the internal lottery, the lottery target roles related to the re-game combination (see FIG. 24), the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, and those related to the control of AT ( (See FIG. 25), lottery target combinations related to small wins and special wins, which are not related to AT control (see FIG. 26), and each lottery target win is determined according to the game state. The number of values is set. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to "65536" in correspondence with a random number (integer of 0 to 65535) for internal lottery. Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination in which "300" is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536. Further, when each lottery target combination is to be selected as a lottery target according to the game state, a number of determination values of 4 or more is set in advance (indicated by "○" in FIGS. 24 to 26). If the player wins with a probability of "1/16384" (4/65536) or higher, but is not subject to the lottery depending on the game state, 0 is set as the number of judgment values (in FIGS. 24 to 26, "1/16384" (FIGS. 24 to 26). -”), The lottery target combination is not won.

In addition, each lottery target combination includes a predetermined winning combination, and by winning one lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the winning combination included in the lottery target combination is allowed to win. As a result, the winning combination is stopped on the winning lines LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, so that the winning is generated. Then, according to the winning combination of the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN, if the winning combination is a replaying combination, a replay is given, and if the winning combination is a small combination, the winning combination is given. A predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the winning combination, and if the winning combination is a special combination, the winning combination is controlled to a special state.

In addition, some of the lottery target roles to be drawn in the internal lottery include AT, and at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, the lottery target role including AT is in a state not controlled by AT. By winning, it will be decided to control the AT. In addition, at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, it is decided that the number of remaining games of the AT will be added by winning the lottery target combination including the AT while being controlled by the AT, and the winning AT The number of additional games determined in advance according to the type of the lottery target combination including the above will be added to the number of remaining games of the AT. In this embodiment, some of the lottery target combinations include AT, and the AT and the additional game are won by winning the lottery target combination including AT, but the lottery target including AT When the winning combination is won, only the AT lottery that decides whether to control the AT and the additional lottery that decides whether to give the extra game are decided, and the lottery target including the AT is decided by the internal lottery. When the AT lottery and the additional lottery are performed with the winning combination as an opportunity, and by winning the lottery, the AT and the additional game can be won, that is, when deciding whether or not to grant the AT and the additional game. In addition, the second stage lottery may be performed when the result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to grant the AT and the additional game, the AT is determined based only on the result of the internal lottery, and the number of additional games is determined by the result of the internal lottery. The configuration may be such that a second stage lottery is performed to determine the result when a predetermined result is obtained. Further, when the main control unit 41 decides whether or not to give the AT and the additional game, the main control unit 41 performs the second stage lottery for the AT when the result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result. The number of additional games may be determined based only on the result of the internal lottery. Further, the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform a lottery of three or more stages when deciding whether or not to give an AT and an additional game.

In addition, regarding the lottery target roles related to the special role among the lottery target roles, the game state is the normal game state in which the special role is not carried over, the carryover state in which the special role is carried over (internal), or the special state. At least one of the lottery target combination that is the target of the internal lottery or the number of judgment values (winning probability) differs depending on whether it is a certain RB (including RB in BB1, 2), and for the lottery target combination related to the small combination, the game state is Lottery target for internal lottery depending on whether it is in the normal game state, carried over (internal), RB in BB1 (BB1), RB in BB2 (BB2), or RB by RB winning (RB in the figure) At least one of the winning combination or the number of judgment values (winning probability) is different, and the lottery target winning combination related to the re-gaming combination is internally depending on whether the gaming state is RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4. At least one of the lottery target combination to be the target of the lottery or the number of judgment values (winning probability) thereof is different.

As shown in FIG. 24, as the lottery target roles related to the re-game, the normal re-game, RT2 transition re-game 1, RT2 transition re-game 2, RT2 transition re-game 3, RT2 transition re-game 4, RT2 transition re-game 5, RT2 Transition re-game 6, RT3 transition re-game, RT1 transition re-game 1, RT1 transition re-game 2, RT1 transition re-game 3, RT1 transition re-game 4, RT1 transition re-game 5, RT1 transition re-game 6, advantageous state transition re-game Game 1, advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, advantageous state transition re-game 2, advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are included. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more re-game roles as winning roles, and if the lottery target role related to re-game is won in the internal lottery, one of the re-game roles will always win. Then, a replay game (replay game) is given.

In RT0, among the lottery target roles related to the re-game, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, and the number of judgment values of 0 is set for the other lottery target roles related to the re-game. .. Further, in RT1, for the normal re-game, the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, a number of judgment values of 4 or more is set, and the number of judgment values is set to 4 or more. For the lottery target combination, the number of determination values of 0 is set. Further, in RT2, a judgment value number of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, the RT3 transition re-game, the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT. For other lottery target combinations related to replay, a number of determination values of 0 is set. Further, in RT3, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, and related to other re-games. For the lottery target combination, the number of determination values of 0 is set. In addition, in the inside, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal re-game, and it is invalid for the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, and is read in the internal lottery. It is not issued, and the number of judgment values of 0 is set for the lottery target roles related to other replay games. Further, in the RB, the number of determination values of 0 is set for the lottery target combination related to these replays.

In this embodiment, the lottery target combination for which the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set can be won by the internal lottery in the gaming state in which the number of judgment values is set, and is considered as a substantial lottery target. However, the lottery target combination for which the number of determination values of 0 is set is not actually won by the internal lottery in the game state in which the number of determination values is set, and is not a substantial lottery target. For example, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are subject to a substantial lottery in any of the game states because the number of determination values of 4 or more is set in each of the game states. , The advantageous state transition re-game 1 and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 are not substantially subject to the lottery in any of the game states because the number of determination values of 0 is set in any of the game states.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, there is no setting difference for the lottery target combination related to the re-game, and the winning is won by the internal lottery with the same probability regardless of the set value (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. To do.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to the re-game, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are the targets of the AT lottery, and when the lottery target combination is won without being controlled by the AT. , AT is won, and when the lottery target combination is won while being controlled by AT, the additional number of games remaining in AT is won. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination related to other replay games is won, it means that the AT has not been won (non-winning).

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to the re-game, RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are navigation targets, and these lottery target roles are won while being controlled by the AT. When this happens, navigation notification is performed.

As shown in FIG. 25, the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, and the lottery target roles related to the control of AT, are cherry, cherry + AT, watermelon, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2. , Push order bell 3, Push order bell 4, Push order bell 5, Push order bell 6, SB, RB + Cherry, RB + Cherry + AT, RB + Watermelon, RB + Watermelon + AT, BB1 + Cherry, BB1 + Cherry + AT, BB1 + Watermelon, BB1 + Watermelon + AT , BB2 + cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon + AT are included. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more small roles and special roles as winning roles, and if the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles are won in the internal lottery, as winning roles. When a small role wins, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out, and when a special role wins as a winning role, it is controlled to a special state according to the special role, and none of the winning roles wins. When it happens, it will be off.

Among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles in RT0-3 and inside, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, Pushing order Bell 6, SB, RB + Cherry + AT, RB + Watermelon + AT, BB1 + Cherry + AT, BB1 + Watermelon + AT, BB2 + Cherry + AT, BB2 + Watermelon + AT, 4 or more judgment values are set, and small and special roles Among the lottery target roles related to, the number of judgment values of 0 is set for cherry, watermelon, RB + cherry, RB + watermelon, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + watermelon, BB2 + cherry, and BB2 + watermelon. In addition, in RB, among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, cherry, watermelon, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, push order bell 6 Has a number of judgment values of 4 or more, and among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + For cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon + AT, the number of determination values of 0 is set.

In this embodiment, in the RB, the number of determination values of the lottery target combination (small combination + AT, special combination + small combination + AT, special combination + AT) including AT is set to 0, so that during RB (in BB1, In BB2, RB), the number of ATs and AT additional games described later is not won, but even in RB, the number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT is set to 4 or more. The AT and the number of additional games of AT may be won, and as such a configuration, for example, a difference is provided in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. In the RB controlled by the winning of a special role that has not been performed, the number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT may be 4 or more, and the number of additional games of AT and AT may be won, or the slot machine. The number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT in the RB controlled by the winning of the special combination, which has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value (1 to 6) of 1. May be set to 4 or more, and the number of ATs and AT additional games may be won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, there is no setting difference between the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination and related to the AT control, and the slot Winning by internal lottery with the same probability regardless of the set value (1 to 6) of machine 1.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon + AT are subject to the AT lottery. When the lottery target combination is won without being controlled by AT, it means that the lottery target combination is won, and when the lottery target combination is won while being controlled by AT, the number of remaining games of AT is The addition will be won. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination related to the control of the AT is won, which is the lottery target combination related to other small roles and special roles, the AT is not won (non-winning).

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles, push order bells 1 to 6 are navigation targets, and when these lottery target roles are won while being controlled by the AT, the navigation notification is sent. Will be done. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination related to the other small combination and the special combination and related to the AT control is won, the navigation notification is not performed regardless of whether or not the AT is controlled.

In addition, in the inside and RB (including RB in RB, RB in BB1 and RB in BB2), the special role, the special role + AT, and the special role + general role are not subject to the internal lottery.

As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role and not related to the AT control include the bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. Is done. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more small roles, special roles, and replaying roles as winning roles, and when the lottery target roles related to the small roles and special roles are won in the internal lottery, When a small role wins a prize, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out, and when a special role wins as a prize, it is controlled to a special state according to the special role, and a special replay as a prize. When a game wins, a replay game (replay game) is given, and when none of the winning combinations wins, it is lost.

Among the lottery target roles related to small and special roles in RT0 to 3, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. .. Further, in RB, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set for the bell, and the number of determination values is set to 0 for RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, and BB2, BB2 + special replay.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, for the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination and not related to the AT control, the setting difference is provided for each of the lottery target combinations, and the slot machine. Winning by internal lottery with different probabilities depending on the set value (1 to 6) of 1.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, none of Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay is subject to AT lottery, and these lottery target roles are When winning, the AT and the number of additional games will be out of the question.

In addition, among the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles, bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay are not subject to navigation, and these lottery target roles were won. Occasionally, navigation notification is not performed regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT.

Next, the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 and the outline of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28.

In the present embodiment, in the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and special roles (RB, BB1, BB2) are carried over as normal gaming states, and a bonus is given as a special state. (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2) is included, and is controlled to any one of the gaming states.

RT0 shifts at the end of the bonus (BB1, RB). Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT0 shifts to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or when SB wins a prize, or by winning a special role. It ends by moving to the inside. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

In RT1, at RT0, a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or SB wins, and at RT2 and RT3, a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or RT1 transition again. It shifts when the game and SB win a prize. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT1, the RT1 is terminated by shifting to RT2 by winning the RT2 transition re-game or by shifting to the inside by winning a special role. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

RT2 shifts when the RT2 transition re-game wins in RT1. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 shifts to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or shifts to RT3 when the RT3 transition re-game wins. It ends when the special role is elected and moves to the inside. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% at least when the stop operations are performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

RT3 shifts when the RT3 transition re-game wins in RT2. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT3, the RT3 shifts to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the winning line LN, or when the RT1 transition replay or SB wins a prize. It ends when the special role is elected and moves to the inside. The medal payout rate per game exceeds 100% at least when the stop operations are performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

Inside, RT0-3 will be transferred by winning special roles (RB, BB1, BB2). Then, in the inside, regardless of the number of games after the transition to the inside, the special role that triggered the transition to the inside wins a bonus (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2). It ends by migrating. The medal payout rate per game is less than 100% regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

RB (RB) shifts inside by winning RB. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are digested or 6 times are won. Further, in the RB, the special role and the replaying role are excluded from the internal lottery, and the winning probability of the small winning combination is higher than that of RT0 to 3 and is high (about 1 / 1.0), and per game. The medal payout rate exceeds 100%.

BB1 and BB2 (RB) are transferred inside by winning BB1 and BB2. Then, in BB1 and BB2, regardless of the number of games after the transition to BB1 and BB2, the total number of medals paid out during BB1 and BB2 exceeds the specified number (316 in this embodiment). finish. Further, in BB1 and BB2, the above-mentioned RB is always controlled, and in the RB in BB1 and BB2, the special combination and the re-game combination are excluded from the internal lottery. Therefore, the winning probability of the small combination is determined. It has a higher probability (about 1 / 1.0) than RT0 to 3, and the medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%.

Among the bonuses (RB, BB1, BB2) in RT0 to 3, the inside, the bonus (RB, BB1, BB2) has the highest medal payout rate per game, and is the most advantageous gaming state. Further, among RTs 0 to 3, RTs 2 and 3 have a higher probability of winning the re-game combination, and the medal payout rate per game is higher than that of RT0 and 1, which is higher than that of RT0 and 1. It can be said that it is in an advantageous state for. Further, among RT2, 3 and the inside, RT2, 3 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than the inside in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of the inside.

Next, a combination of symbols that stop on the winning line LN of the reel according to the type of the lottery target combination and the stop order of the internal lottery will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, when RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and stop order. .. The RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 include at least an RT2 transition re-game and a normal re-game as winning combinations, and the RT2 transition re-game is a re-game in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. This is a transitional combination in which the game state is shifted to RT2, and the normal re-gaming combination includes a re-gaming combination in which a replay game is only given by winning a prize.

For example, when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left middle right stop order (the left reel as the first stop, the middle reel as the second stop, and the right reel as the third stop). If this is done, the combination of symbols that make up the RT2 transition re-game combination stops on the winning line LN, but if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the left, middle, and right stop order, the normal re-play is performed. The combination of symbols constituting the game combination stops on the winning line LN. Further, when the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won, the same as when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won, in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the type of the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of symbols constituting the RT2 transition replay combination stops on the winning line LN, while the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, which is usually the case. The combination of symbols that make up the replay combination stops on the winning line LN.

As a result, when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in RT1, the RT2 transition re-game combination is won by operating in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is unknown, the type is intentionally used. It is not possible to select the stop order according to, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to shift to RT2 by winning the RT2 transition re-game combination, but if the stop order does not match, the normal re-game combination Will win and RT1 will be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, when RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, a combination of symbols that stop according to the type and stop order. Is different. The RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 include at least an RT1 transition re-game and a normal re-game as winning combinations, and the RT1 transition re-game is a re-game in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. At the same time, it is a transitional combination in which the game state is shifted to RT1, and the normal re-gaming combination is a re-gaming combination in which a replay game is only given by winning a prize.

When the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, if the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order determined in advance according to the type of the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the symbols constituting the normal re-game combination. When the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order while the combination of symbols stops on the winning line LN, the combination of symbols constituting the RT1 transition re-game combination stops on the winning line LN. ..

As a result, when the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in RT2 and RT3, the normal re-game combination is won by operating in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is unknown, the re-game combination is intentionally won. It is not possible to select the stop order according to the type, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to avoid the transition to RT1 by winning the normal replay combination, but the stop order must match. If this is the case, the RT1 transition replay combination will win a prize and be transferred to RT1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, when the RT3 transition re-game is won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. There is no. The RT3 transition re-game includes at least the RT3 transition re-game as a winning combination, and the RT3 transition re-game is a re-game in which a replay game is given by winning a prize and the game state is changed to RT3. It is a transition role to be migrated.

When the RT3 transition re-game is won, the combination of symbols constituting the RT3 transition re-game combination stops on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when the RT3 transition re-game is won in RT2, the RT3 transition re-game wins a prize regardless of the stop order, and the RT3 transition re-game wins the prize, so that the RT3 shifts to RT3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, in the present embodiment, even when the advantageous state transition replays 1 and 2 are won as the lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the symbols are stopped according to the type and the stop order. The combination is not different. The advantageous state transition re-game 1 includes at least the advantageous state transition re-game combination 1 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-game combination 1 is a re-game combination in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. At the same time, it is a transitional role that shifts to an advantageous state (a state in which AT is controlled). Further, the advantageous state transition re-game 2 includes at least an advantageous state transition re-game combination 2 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-game combination 2 is a re-game combination in which a replay game is given by winning a prize. At the same time, it is a transitional role that shifts to an advantageous state (a state in which AT is controlled).

When the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won, the combination of the symbols constituting the winning advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 is stopped on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won in RTs 1 to 3, the advantageous state transition re-game combination wins regardless of the stop order, and the advantageous state transition re-game combination wins, so that the advantageous state shifts to the advantageous state. It will be migrated.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won as the lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the combination of the symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. The push order bells 1 to 6 include at least a bell and a special small winning combination as winning combinations, and the bell is a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. In addition, the special small winning combination is a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out, which is smaller than that at the time of winning the bell.

For example, when the push order bell 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left middle right stop order (the left reel as the first stop, the middle reel as the second stop, and the right reel as the third stop). In that case, while the combination of symbols that make up the bell stops on the winning line LN, if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order of left, middle, and right, the symbols that make up the special small winning combination. The combination of the above or the combination of the specific symbols without the awarding of medals stops on the winning line LN. Further, when the push order bells 2 to 6 are won, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order predetermined according to the type of the push order bells 2 to 6, as in the case where the push order bell 1 is won. When this is done, the combination of symbols that make up the bell stops on the winning line LN, while if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, the symbols that make up the special small winning combination A combination or a combination of specific symbols without medals is stopped on the winning line LN.

Therefore, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the push order bells 1 to 6 are operated in the stop order according to the type. Further, particularly in RT2 and RT3, since the specific symbol stops when the stop order does not match, if the stop order does not match, the process shifts to RT1 at a constant rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, when the SB is won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the specific symbols constituting the SB winning priority are given priority to the winning line regardless of the stop order. Stop at LN. Therefore, in RTs 0 to 3, when the SB is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the specific symbol can be stopped, so that the specific symbol constituting the SB winning is stopped and the system shifts to RT1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, when RB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry, and BB2 + cherry are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the constituent symbols of the cherries have priority regardless of the stop order. Then stop at the winning line LN. In addition, when RB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon, and BB2 + watermelon are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the constituent symbols of the watermelon are given priority and stopped at the winning line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, when these special roles + small roles are won, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the constituent symbols of the small combination can be stopped, so that the constituent symbols of the small combination are stopped and the winning special role is It will be carried over to the next game or later, and the winning special role will be stopped by the stop operation at the timing when the composition symbol of the small role cannot be stopped and the composition symbol of the winning special role can be stopped. The composition symbol of is stopped, and it will be transferred to the bonus.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, when BB1 + special re-game and BB2 + special re-game are won as lottery target combinations in the internal lottery, the configuration of the special re-game is irrespective of the stop order. The symbol has priority and stops at the winning line LN. As a result, when these special roles + special re-games are won, the constituent symbols of the special re-games are stopped, and the winning special roles are carried over to the next game or later.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, when the gaming states are RT1, 2, and 3, the main control unit 41 can execute a navigation notification that notifies the player in an advantageous stop order according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT), which is the notification period.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the notification target combination according to the game state, and the sub control unit 91 receives the first internal winning command. , The second internal winning command and the push order command are transmitted to execute the navigation effect by the sub control unit 91. The notification target combinations according to the game state are RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT1 is set, and RT1 shift regames 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT2 is set. Is. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying certain conditions even in the normal state where the AT is not set. In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player is identifiable by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

In the navigation effect of this embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player notified by the navigation notification is notified by the display of the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the output of the navigation voice from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, when notifying the stop order of left middle right, a stop switch 8L such as "123" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). A stop order image showing the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left middle right!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). Is output. Further, when notifying the stop order in which the left reel is the first stop, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as "1--" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display stop order images. Further, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is output. To do. The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal display 51, the speakers 53, 54, and may be executed by using the effect effect LED 52, the reel LED 55, or the like.

In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any one of the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the RT2 transition re-game wins is identifiable. Further, when any one of the push order bells 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the bell wins is identifiablely notified. Further, also in RT2, when any one of RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 is won in RT3, the stop order in which the normal re-game wins is identifiablely notified. Further, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won in both RT2 and RT3, the stop order in which the bells win is identifiablely notified. In addition, when the SB is elected, the fact that the SB is elected is identifiablely notified.

In this way, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in an identifiable manner. Therefore, the player can intentionally win the RT2 transition re-game in RT1 and shift to RT2, or win the bell by performing the stop operation in the stop order according to the navigation effect. In RTs 2 and 3, it is possible to avoid winning the RT1 transition replay by winning the normal replay, winning the bell, avoiding the stoppage of the specific symbol, and avoiding the SB winning.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to control the AT by an internal lottery. Then, when the AT is won by the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 controls the AT after a precursory period. The state from the start of AT control to the transition to RT2 is also called the preparation state. The main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification when the target combination is won in the ready state. At this time, in RT1, the navigation notification is applied when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, and the stop order for winning the RT2 transition re-game when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won is notified by the navigation notification. By performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, it is possible to win the RT2 transition re-game and shift from RT1 to RT2. In addition, after the transition to the ready state, the stop order for winning the middle bell is notified when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, so the medal can be surely obtained by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. It becomes possible.

The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the RT2 transition replay wins a prize in RT1 and shifts to RT2. Along with this, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining AT games assigned to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining AT games. Even after shifting to RT1, the stop order for winning the bells will be notified when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, so it is possible to reliably win medals by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. At the same time, it is possible to avoid stopping the specific symbol and avoid shifting to RT1. In addition, after shifting to RT2, the stop order for winning the normal re-game is notified when the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won. Therefore, by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, the RT1 transition re-game It is possible to wait until the RT3 transition combination is won, and to win the RT3 transition combination to transfer to RT3 while avoiding the prize. It is possible to avoid shifting to RT1, and since it is notified that the SB has won when the SB is won, it is possible to avoid winning the SB and avoid shifting to RT1.

Further, after the start of the AT, the number of remaining games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0, the control of the AT is terminated. Along with this, the navigation notification will not be executed, so it is possible to avoid stopping the specific symbol when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, and to avoid winning the RT1 transition regame when the RT1 transition regames 1 to 6 are won. It becomes impossible, and the control of a series of ATs is completed by shifting to RT1 by stopping the specific symbol or winning the RT1 transition re-game. Further, if the addition of the remaining games of AT is won by the internal lottery after the start of AT and before the number of remaining games becomes 0, the number of winning games is added to the remaining games of AT.

Further, if the special combination is won after the start of the AT and before the number of remaining games becomes 0, the AT is interrupted by the end of RT1, and the counting of the number of AT games is also interrupted accordingly. If a special role is won during the AT and the AT is interrupted, then the winning special role is won and the corresponding bonus is controlled, and the specific symbol stops at RT0, which shifts after the bonus ends, to RT1. At the time of the shift, the control of the AT is restarted, and the count of the remaining games of the AT is restarted by shifting to the RT2 again after the preparation state.

Further, the main control unit 41 notifies the stop order in which the bells win by the navigation notification when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won during AT, and ignores the notified stop order to perform the stop operation. In some cases, the bell wins and RT2 and 3 are maintained, but in some cases, the specific symbol stops and shifts to RT1. Further, if the stop operation is performed while ignoring the notified stop order at the time of winning the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, the RT1 transition re-game wins and shifts to RT1. If the game shifts from RT2, 3 to RT1 during AT, the AT continues, and the number of remaining games of AT is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and the RT2 transition replay 11 in RT1 is the same as in the prepared state. It is possible to notify the stop order of winning the RT1 transition re-game at the time of winning of ~ 6 by the navigation notification, and to win the RT1 transition re-game and shift from RT1 to RT2 by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order. It is possible.

Next, the control contents of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36.

In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target combination, and a lottery target combination that may be carried over, that is, a special combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special combination is set. A lottery target combination that is not carried over, that is, a general combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the special winning combination number table, when none of the special winning combination is won, that is, the winning number of the outlier is "0", and the winning number of BB1, BB2, RB, SB is "1". "To" 4 "are assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the general winning combination winning number table, "0" is used as the winning number of the winning combination for the re-game when none of the general winning combination is won, that is, when the winning combination is out of the game. "1" to "16" are assigned, and "20" to "28" are assigned as winning numbers of the lottery target winning combinations related to the small winning combination. As described above, in the special winning combination winning number table and the general winning combination winning number table, the lottery target combination of the internal lottery and the winning number are set correspondingly.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the internal lottery process when the start operation is performed, and when any of the special combination and the general combination is won in the internal lottery, , The winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination for which the winning is determined is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if none of the winning combinations are won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared after each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role wins. It will be cleared.

After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes the internal winning command setting process, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning are based on the internal winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the internal winning command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired (Sk1), and the acquired winning number is obtained. , The transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of two bytes, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores a MODE indicating that it is the first internal winning command in the first byte, and wins a special role in the EXT of the second byte. Store the number.

In the step of Sk3, after storing the first internal winning command, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the internal lottery process (Sk4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. Winning obtained by sequentially determining whether or not there is (Sk5), whether or not it is less than 15 (Sk6), whether or not it is less than 22 (Sk7), and whether or not it is less than 28 (Sk8). It is determined which of the plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sk5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, when the winning number is 0 or 1, the acquired winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 for transmission winning. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk9). Further, if it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the Sk5 step and less than 15 in the Sk6 step, that is, if the winning number is any of 2 to 14, the winning number for transmission is used. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk10). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 15 in the step of Sk6 and it is determined that the winning number is less than 22 in the step of Sk7, that is, when the winning number is either 20 or 21, the winning number is assigned. The transmission winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk9). Further, when it is determined that the winning number is not less than 22 in the Sk7 step and less than 28 in the Sk8 step, that is, when the winning number is any of 22 to 27, it is used as the transmission winning number. 22 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sk10). Further, when it is determined in the step of Sk8 that the winning number is not less than 28, that is, when the winning number is 28, the winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmitting winning number (Sk9).

Then, after the transmission winning number of the general combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps of Sk9, Sk10, and Sk11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. When the main control unit 41 stores the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the second internal winning command is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and serves as a general role in the EXT of the second byte. Stores the winning number for transmission.

After the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue in the Sk10 step, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the transmitting winning number, and the first winning number including the transmitting winning number is set. Set the internal winning command of to the command queue.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 16 to 21, 28) is set in the internal winning, the command is used. The winning number by the internal lottery can be specified based on the included sending winning number.

On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 14), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 14) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range (2 to 14) the winning number is based on, while the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 14). It is possible to identify something.

If the winning number is within the third predetermined range (22 to 27), one winning number (22) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. Set the second internal winning command, including the number, in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command, which is transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (22 to 27) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (22 to 27) the winning number is based on, while the winning number is within the third predetermined range (22 to 27). It is possible to identify something.

The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment are subsequently executed by the timer interrupt processing (main) to the sub-control unit 91. Will be transmitted sequentially.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub control unit 91, but the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example and other data. The form may be used. Further, in this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command composed of 2 bytes are transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and 2 of each command. Although the configuration includes the winning number for transmission in the byte, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal winning command and the second internal Each winning command is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the 3rd byte includes the special winning transmission winning number or the general winning transmission winning number, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. It may be configured by one signal consisting of 3 bytes, the 2nd byte including the winning number for transmission of the special combination, and the 3rd byte including the winning number for transmission of the general combination.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning numbers of the special winning combination and the general winning combination are assigned separately, that is, the special winning combination corresponding to the types and deviations of the special winning combination (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) in the special winning combination winning number table. The winning number of the general winning combination is set, and the winning number of the general winning combination is set according to the type of the general winning combination and the loss of the general winning combination in the general winning combination winning number table. The winning number and the winning number of the general winning combination are set in the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c, respectively, but the winning number is assigned without dividing into the special winning combination and the general winning combination, for example, "BB1", "small winning combination", " A winning number may be assigned to each of the "BB1 + small winning combination (for example, BB1 + cherry shown in FIG. 25)" that is won at the same time. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won based only on the one winning number. It is possible to determine whether or not the reels are being used, and perform predetermined control (setting of internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.).

Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

In this embodiment, a navigation number (0 to 9) that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification and a navigation number (10 to 13) that can identify a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification are assigned in advance, and a lottery is performed. Of the target combinations, the notification target combination is assigned a navigation number in advance for each type, and the navigation number table in which the navigation number for each type of the lottery target combination is set is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

As shown in FIG. 34, the navigation numbers are 0 indicating the standard push order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), the first stop is the left reel 2L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 2C, showing the stop order with the third stop as the right reel 2R 1, showing the stop order with the first stop as the left reel 2L, the second stop as the right reel 2R, and the third stop as the middle reel 2C 2, first The stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the right reel 2R 3. The first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the right reel 2R, and the third stop is the left. Reel 2L indicates stop order 4, 1st stop is right reel 2L, 2nd stop is left reel 2L, 3rd stop is middle reel 2C 5, 1st stop is right reel 2R, 1st 2 Stop is the middle reel 2C, the third stop is the left reel 2L 6, the stop order is the left reel 2L as the first stop, that is, the left first stop is shown 7, and the middle reel 2C is the first stop. The stop order to be performed, that is, 8 indicating the middle first stop, and the stop order in which the right reel 2R is the first stop, that is, 9 indicating the right first stop are set. In addition, as the navigation number, it suggests a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of red 7 can be stopped at the winning line LN10, and suggests a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of blue 7 can be stopped at the winning line LN11. 12 is set to suggest a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of White 7 can be stopped at the winning line LN, and 13 is set to suggest a stop operation at the timing when the symbol of BAR can be stopped at the winning line LN.

In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0, but the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. Any other stop order may be used as long as it is a standard push order.

In the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of special role, and 10 is set for BB1, 11 is set for BB2, 12 is set for RB, and 13 is set for SB. If the special role is not won, 0 is set.

Further, in the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of the notification target combination among the lottery target combinations, and the RT2 transition replay 1, RT1 transition replay 1, and push order bell 1 are described as "1". "2" is for RT2 transition re-game 2, RT1 transition re-game 2, and push order bell 2, and "3" is for RT2 transition re-game 3, RT1 transition re-game 3, and push order bell 3. , RT2 transition re-game 4, RT1 transition re-game 4, push order bell 4 "4", RT2 transition re-game 5, RT1 transition re-game 5, push order bell 5 "5", RT2 "6" is set for the transition re-game 6, the RT1 transition re-game 6, and the push order bell 6. Navi numbers are not set for the normal re-game, RT3 transition re-game, advantageous state transition re-game 1, 2, cherry, watermelon, and bell, which are not the notification target roles among the lottery target roles.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 wins a general combination set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the start operation is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. The push order command setting process for setting the push order command according to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the push order command setting process, first, in the internal lottery process, the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c are acquired (Sm1), and then the RAM 41c With reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being performed, which is set in the predetermined area of the above, the state in which the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT, it will be described later. It is determined whether or not the condition is from the time when the conditions for implementing the special role navigation notification to the time when the special role is awarded) (Sm2). If it is determined in the step of Sm2 that the navigation notification is not performed, whether or not the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is determined based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sm5), and if the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is not determined, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation number (Sm6).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sm2 that the navigation notification is performed, and when it is determined in the step of Sm5 that the winning combination to stop at the winning line LN is confirmed, it is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table, the navigation numbers corresponding to the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination acquired in the step of Sm1 are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the transmission navigation numbers.

At this time, if it is specified that RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 have been won based on the internal winning number, the combination of RT2 transition re-games is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Set the navigation number indicating the stop order to be performed as the transmission navigation number. Further, when it is specified that the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 have been won, the navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of the normal re-games is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Is set as the navigation number for transmission.

In addition, when it is specified that the push order bells 1 to 6 are won based on the internal winning number, the stop order in which the combination of bells is stopped at the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination is set. Set the indicated navigation number as the transmission navigation number.

In addition, one of the special roles (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) is won based on the internal winning number, and the implementation conditions for the special role navigation notification (in this embodiment, after the special role is won, the predetermined game If it is specified that the number (for example, 5 games) has passed) and none of the small wins have been won (missing), the type of special win has been selected. Correspondingly, a navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting a symbol constituting the special combination is set as a transmission navigation number.

After setting the transmission navigation number in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of Sm3 or the step of Sm6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sm4). When the push order command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the push order command is in the first byte, and stores a transmission navigation number in the EXT of the second byte.

After the push order command is stored in the command queue in the step of Sm4, the push order command setting process is finished and the process returns to the main process (main).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process when the start operation is performed, which is advantageous for the player when the navigation notification is being executed. If a push order command that can specify the stop operation mode is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also sets a push order command in the command queue that can specify the stop order, which is a standard stop operation mode.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment executes the push order command setting process each time the stop operation is performed, so that the main control unit 41 stops at the winning line LN even when the navigation notification is not being executed. If is confirmed, a push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is set in the command queue.

Further, in the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, the push order command setting process is executed, so that, for example, the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won in a state where the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed. In this case, when neither reel 2L, 2C, or 2R is stopped, RT2 transition replay and normal replay can be stopped, but since it is not certain which combination will be stopped, standard navigation The number (“0”) is set as the transmission navigation number, and the push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Also, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the RT2 transition re-game and the normal transition re-game can still be stopped, and it has not been determined which combination will be stopped, so it is standard as a transmission navigation number. A push order command including a navigation number ("0") is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the RT2 transition replay can be stopped by the subsequent stop of the right reel 2R, and the combination of stopping. Is confirmed, so even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number ("1") that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player (the stop order that wins the RT2 transition re-game) is sent. It is set as a credit navigation number. Further, when a reel other than the left reel 2L is stopped in the first stop, the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and then a reel other than the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop. Regardless of the order, only replays can be stopped normally, and the winning combination is fixed. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number (navigation number) that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. "1") is set as the transmission navigation number.

Further, even when the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won in the state where the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed, the RT2 transition re-game is the same as when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won. , When it is not certain which combination of the normal replay will be stopped, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and either the RT2 transition replay or the normal replay is stopped. When it is decided whether or not to do so, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player is set.

Further, for example, when the game state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed, the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won, and none of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, RT1 The transition re-game and the normal re-game can be stopped, but since it is not certain which combination will be stopped, the standard navigation number ("0") that cannot specify the stop order of the RT1 transition re-game is It is set as a transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the normal re-game can be stopped, and the winning combination is determined, which is advantageous for the player even in a state where the navigation notification is not performed. A navigation number (“1”) that can specify the stop order (the stop order in which the normal re-game is won) is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the RT1 transition re-game is stopped, so that the navigation number (““ Stop order ”) that is advantageous to the player can be specified. 1 ”) is set as the transmission navigation number.

Further, even when the RT1 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won in a state where the game state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed, the RT1 transition re-game 1 is transferred in the same manner as when the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won. When it is uncertain whether the re-game or normal re-game will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and either the RT1 transition re-game or the normal re-game combination is set. When it is decided whether or not to stop, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player is set.

Also, even if the push order bells 1 to 6 are won without the navigation notification being performed, either the bell or the special small role or the role of the special small role is the same as when the RT2 transition replay games 1 to 6 are won. When it is not certain whether the specific symbol will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and when it is decided which combination or specific symbol will stop, it is advantageous for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a different stop order (stop order for winning a bell) is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification target combination is elected in the state where the main control unit 41 is not controlling the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined for the player. A push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice combination (the combination in which there are three advantageous stop orders for the player), and the six-choice combination (game). In a combination in which there are six stop orders that are advantageous to the player, for example, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6, RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, and push order bells 1 to 6) in this embodiment, the first stop operation is performed. Therefore, it is the timing when it is determined that the winning combination for the player does not stop, or the timing when the second stop operation is performed.

In addition, in the game after the special role has been won and the conditions for implementing the prescribed navigation notification have been met, the internal lottery result shows that none of the small roles have been won. In that case, a push order command including a navigation number ("10" to "13") suggesting a symbol constituting one special role that has been won is set.

The push order commands set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment are subsequently transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main).

Then, when the sub control unit 91 is specified to perform navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the above-mentioned first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command. In addition, a navigation effect is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 performs the navigation effect, the winning of the notification target combination is specified based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than "0" based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the push order advantageous to the player is other than the standard push order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stop order image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. To display. Further, in the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed with an image suggesting a winning combination based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won as the notification target combination, the possibility of winning the bell is suggested by displaying the image of the "bell", and the RT2 transition replay games 1 to 6 are displayed. 6. If RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, there is a possibility of winning a prize based on the game state on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command or the like. The type of group (any of RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6) is specified, and the combination included in the specified re-game combination (for example, in RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6, RT2 transition is performed. In the re-game and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a winning role that is advantageous to the player by performing the effect according to the re-game).

Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the re-game combination group in the navigation effect, for example, even if RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command setting process on the main control unit 41 side. , As the winning number for transmitting the second internal winning command, "2" indicating the winning of any of RT2 transition regames 1 to 6 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 will be uniformly set, but the sub The control unit 91 shifts to RT1 by specifying that the transmission winning number is "2" based on the second internal winning command and that the game state is RT2 based on the game state command or the like. It is possible to identify that the re-games 1 to 6 have been won, and to win a normal re-game by operating according to the stop order with an image showing the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. By displaying an image suggesting sex (in this embodiment, an image showing a combination of symbols constituting the normal re-game), a role that is advantageous to the player among the roles included in the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 (in this embodiment). In this embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect according to the role of maintaining RT2).

Further, when it is specified that the special role has been won based on the first internal winning command as an effect suggesting the winning of the special role in the navigation effect, the sub-control unit 91 then performs the above-mentioned special role. When the predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) for which the conditions for implementing the navigation notification are satisfied have passed, a definite notification (special role on the liquid crystal display 51) is notified that the special role has been won in the internal lottery. Displays a message, an image, etc. indicating that the player has won). Then, after the definite notification is performed, that is, after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, the navigation number specified based on the push order command suggests a predetermined symbol of the special role. In addition, by performing a stop operation at the timing when a predetermined symbol can be stopped at the winning line LN according to the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect (for example, specified based on the navigation number) for promoting the winning of a special role is performed. The liquid crystal display 51 for displaying an image of a predetermined pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, etc.). In this way, the sub-control unit 91 plays a predetermined number of games after the special combination is won based on the first internal winning command, and the execution condition of the special combination navigation notification is established on the main control unit 41 side. Since the final control notification is performed when it is determined that the special role has been played, the main control unit 41 includes a navigation number suggesting a symbol capable of winning the special role after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied. By transmitting the push order command, the sub-control unit 91 can be made to perform the special role winning promotion effect based on the navigation number after the confirmation notification is performed.

Next, the control content of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

In this embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination, and a winning number table in which the winning number is set for each type of winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of ROM 41b. There is.

When all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 has won a prize according to the combination of the symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. The winning judgment process for determining whether or not to perform is executed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. When it is determined that, the winning number corresponding to the combination of the symbols constituting the stopped winning combination is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with reference to the winning number table, while the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination. If it is determined that is not stopped, "0" indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is completed.

Then, after executing the winning determination processing, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination command setting process for setting the winning determination command capable of specifying the winning number in the command queue.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the winning determination command setting process, the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the winning determination result in the winning determination process (Sn1), and the winning determination command is obtained based on the winning number. Is stored in the command queue (Sn2), and the winning judgment command setting process is completed. When the winning determination command is stored in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores a MODE indicating that the winning determination command is a winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in the EXT of the second byte.

The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is subsequently transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt processing (main).

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the winning determination command setting process when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and sets the winning determination command including the winning number. The winning determination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

Further, in the winning judgment command setting process of this embodiment, the winning judgment command that includes the winning number set in the RAM 41c in the winning judgment processing as it is is set in the command queue, so that it can be used as a special command that can specify the winning number. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

Further, in this embodiment, since the winning number is assigned to each type of winning combination and stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number is based on the winning number. It is possible to specify the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R and execute the effect.

A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and an effect control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit determines an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target combination is won. In response to this, it is determined whether or not to control the AT that executes the navigation notification that notifies the operation procedure of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when controlling to the AT, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result is obtained. Is transmitted to the effect control unit regardless of whether or not the AT controls the internal winning command, and the effect control unit identifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command and controls the game. When the unit is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect for notifying the operation procedure advantageous to the player is executed based on the specified internal lottery result.

In such a configuration, the effect control unit can specify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, so that the effect control unit is illegal. By doing so, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, the internal winning command identifies an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility that it will be notified by the production control unit.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment uses the internal lottery result as an internal winning command, and the first internal winning command and the general winning command that can specify the winning status of the special combination as the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command that can specify the winning status is set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the AT is controlled. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but it is general so that the stop order that is advantageous for the player cannot be specified. Since the second internal winning command related to the combination is set, it is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. Since the common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT without specifying the stop order, the process related to the transmission of the second internal winning command can be simplified. Even if the sub-control unit 91 side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect without being controlled by the AT.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a configuration in which the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, is notified by the navigation notification according to the notification target combination won by the internal winning. The control unit 41 operates by navigation notification at one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode of operating in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and an operation mode based on a combination thereof. Even in such a configuration, it is specified that the main control unit 41 has won the notification target combination regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT. However, by setting the second internal winning command so that the operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified, the sub-control unit 91 side responds to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. An operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not specified.

Further, in this embodiment, push order replays (RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6) and push order bells (push order) are used as notification target roles in which the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification. Including bells 1 to 6), the main control unit 41 determines whether the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell when the internal lottery result becomes a notification target combination in the internal winning command setting process. Since the second internal winning command is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91 so that it can be specified, the sub control unit 91 notifies when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination. It is possible to specify whether the target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell, and the sub-control unit 91 can also perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target combination.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is controlled by the AT, and when the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the stop order advantageous to the player is specified. Since the push order command setting process for setting the push order command that can be performed is executed and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, the player can use the sub control unit 91 side in the state where the navigation notification is executed. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as notification target roles for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. The notification target combination won in the internal lottery is different when the internal lottery result is a push order replay and when the push order bell is executed, that is, when the navigation notification is executed. However, when the stop order that is advantageous to the player is common, the push order command including the common navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is set, so that the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order that is advantageous for the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. While setting a push order command including a possible navigation number, in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, it is not possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first stop on the left) is set, the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. Sometimes, the process of setting the push order command including the navigation number can be shared.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped stepwise each time the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, which is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the operation of the third stop is completed. For example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the first is determined. By performing the stop operation, it is determined whether or not the bell can be won, and when the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, whether the RT2 transition re-game can be won by performing the first stop operation. Whether or not it is confirmed, and when the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the normal re-game can be won, and the main control unit 41 In the push order command setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined, that is, the first stop, After the second stop operation is performed, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted to the sub control unit 91. While preventing the player from being identified as a stop order that is advantageous to the player even if fraud is applied, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, the sub-control unit 91 operates in the stop order that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to produce according to whether or not it has been done.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the push order command setting process. When it is determined that the winning combination to be stopped is determined, a push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is set, and the push order command is sent to the sub control unit 91. However, the command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the winning combination to be stopped is determined is different from the push order command. It may also be a command. For example, by transmitting another command including the winning number of the notification target combination won in the internal lottery, the stop order advantageous to the player is determined based on the type of the notification target combination won. The configuration may be such that it can be specified, or it may be configured to provide a separate command including a navigation number that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order is advantageous to the player. By configuring the process to set a command that can specify the above, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed. After the combination to be stopped is determined, each time the push order command setting process is performed, a push order command capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination is determined may be a configuration that is transmitted at least once when the stopping combination is determined, and the stopping combination is determined and the game is played. After the push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the person is transmitted, the push order command setting process may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs push order command setting processing when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are performed in the state of performing the navigation notification. However, in the case where the navigation notification is performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number. The internal winning flag is set, navigation notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, etc. are performed according to the internal winning command, and the winning status of the special role is displayed as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of a general combination are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. It is a configuration, and the winning number when the notification target combination is won as the internal winning result is within a predetermined numerical range (push order replay (RT2 transition replays 1 to 6, RT1 transition replays 1 to 6) as the notification target combination. The winning numbers are 2 to 14, and consecutive numerical values consisting of the pushing order bells (the winning numbers of the pushing order bells 1 to 6 are 22 to 27) are assigned, and in the internal winning command setting process. , When the winning number set in the RAM 41c is within the predetermined numerical range (2 to 14, 22 to 27) in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed while being controlled by the AT, the notification target combination A second internal winning command that can be specified but the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified is set, and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Regardless of whether the control unit 41 controls the AT, the sub-control unit 91 does not specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. Even if the side is cheated, it is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being notified by the navigation effect in a state where the AT is not controlled.

Further, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value consisting of a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 uses the internal lottery result as the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination, the second internal winning command is transmitted. The processing when doing so can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push order replay and the push order bell are included as the notification target roles for which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, That is, the internal lottery result is assigned consecutive numerical values in the first numerical range (2 to 14) as the winning numbers of the winning combinations of the RT2 transition regames 1 to 6 and the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, and the internal lottery is performed. The winning number when the result becomes the push order bell, that is, the winning number of each lottery target combination of the push order bells 1 to 6 as the internal lottery result is assigned a continuous numerical value in the second numerical range (22 to 27). Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery according to whether the winning number is in the first numerical range or the second numerical range. Since it can be determined whether the result is a push order replay or a push order bell, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process.

Further, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can be controlled into a plurality of gaming states including a first state (RT1) and a second state (RT2, RT3), and in each gaming state, it is internal. The types of push order replays as notification target roles determined in the lottery are different (in this embodiment, for example, in RT1, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are lottery target combinations, while RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 is not a lottery target combination, and in RT2 and 3, RT1 transition regames 1 to 6 are lottery target roles, while RT2 transition regames 1 to 6 are not lottery target roles, and the game states RT1 and RT2, The type of notification target combination that is the target of internal winning is different from that of 3), and the winning number and the game state when the internal lottery result is a push order replay in the first state of the game state are the first. Since the winning numbers when the internal lottery result is the push order replay in the second state are all assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 14), in the internal winning command setting process, the first state In both the second state and the second state, the process for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is a push order replay can be standardized.

Further, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment responds to the internal lottery result when the internal lottery result is a combination other than the notification target combination or a loss in the state of not being controlled by the AT. When the second internal winning command including the winning number (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28 in this embodiment) is set and the internal lottery result is the push order replay which is the notification target combination, the first When one winning number (2 in this embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 14) is included and the internal lottery result is the push order bell which is the notification target combination, the second numerical range (22 to 27) is included. By setting a second internal winning command including one winning number (22 in this embodiment) included in), the internal lottery result is the notification target combination in a state where the AT is not controlled. Even if the winning combination is other than the notification target combination, the second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted. Therefore, regardless of whether the internal lottery result is the notification target combination or not. The process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command can be standardized.

In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the notification target combination when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that the player has won, a second internal winning command related to the general role is set so that the stop order that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, but when the state is not controlled by the AT. , When the result of the internal lottery becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but the second internal winning related to the general role can be specified so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. While setting the command, when the AT is in control, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the winning number according to the type of the notification target combination won, for example, as a push order replay When the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won, the winning number "8" is set, and when the pushing order bell 6 is won as the pushing order bell, a second internal winning command including the winning number "27" is set to set the AT. When in the controlled state, a second internal winning command capable of specifying the type of the winning notification target combination may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination, so that the sub On the control unit 91 side, the stop order that is advantageous for the player can be notified by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, so that the lottery target winning combination internally won. An effect according to the type of winning combination included in, for example, an effect suggesting that the normal regame included in the RT1 transition regame 1 may win a prize when the RT1 transition regame 1 is won. Can be done.

Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push order command setting process and not to transmit the push order command, and is controlled by the AT by such a configuration. In the state, the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command according to the type of the notification target combination, and the stop order advantageous to the player can be specified on the sub-control unit 91 side. It can be notified by the navigation effect, and the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

The winning number of the push order replay and the winning number of the push order bell need only be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range and the push order in which the winning number of the push order replay is set are set. The structure may be continuous with the second numerical range in which the winning number of the bell is set. Even with such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, and the winning number used when performing predetermined control is the notification target combination. Since it can be determined whether or not it is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the user, the process of transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, 1 to 28 are assigned as the winning numbers of the general winning combination, and the winning numbers of the push order replay which is the notification target combination are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 14). , The winning number of the push order bell which is the notification target combination is continuously set in the second numerical range (22 to 27), and the winning number of the non-notifying target combination is the first numerical range and the second numerical range. Although the configuration is distributed and set in the numerical range before and after the above, the winning numbers of all the non-notifying target combinations may be continuously set in the third numerical range. With such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination is within the predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination by the winning number used when performing the predetermined control. Since it can be determined by whether or not, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, and it is determined whether or not the winning number assigned to the non-notifying target combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The process to be performed can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 has the same type of notification target combination group (in this embodiment, the push order replay group and the push order bell) regardless of the game state. The same transmission winning number (in this embodiment, "2" for the push order replay group and "22" for the push order bell group) is uniformly set for each group), and the transmission is performed. The configuration is such that a second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, but in the internal winning command setting process, at least the group of the notification target role for which the same transmission winning number is set is set. , Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has been won, but it is possible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player. It suffices to prevent this, and the groups of the same type of notification target roles that are subject to lottery in one game state are divided into multiple groups so that each group includes one role that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, a different transmission winning number may be set for each divided group. As a result, it is possible for the sub-control unit 91 side to specify whether the notification target combination belonging to any of the plurality of groups has been elected, and to execute the effect according to the specified group.

Next, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40.

Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of this embodiment is rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) provided corresponding to each. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are composed of a hybrid stepping motor that makes one revolution in a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and are based on a phase signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on control by the main control unit 41. , The excitation state of each exciting phase (four phases of φ1 to φ4 in this embodiment) in the stepping motor is switched between exciting and non-exciting in a predetermined order to rotate.

The main control unit 41 rotates each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, setting 0 as the number of steps when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R provided on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. To control. Further, in the above-mentioned main process, an excitation pattern for rotating the reel in a predetermined mode is set, and in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (main), it is specified based on the excitation pattern and the number of steps from the reel reference position. A control signal indicating the excitation state of each exciting phase of the stepping motor is output to the motor drive circuit 45, and the motor drive circuit 45 outputs a phase signal indicating the excitation state based on the control signal to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. Is output to. As a result, in each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, the exciting state of the exciting phase of the reel motor is switched from the phase signal and controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and each reel 2L, 2C corresponding to the reel motor 2R is designed to control the rotation.

The reel motor excitation pattern set by the main control unit 41 by the main process includes a game excitation pattern group for controlling the rotation of the reel according to the progress of the game, and the excitation pattern for the game is not directly related to the progress of the game. For example, a non-game excitation pattern group for performing an effect using a reel is included, and these excitation patterns are predetermined in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Among the excitation patterns of the reel motor, the game excitation pattern group includes a start pattern for starting the rotation of the reel in a stopped state and accelerating to a predetermined constant speed state, and a predetermined constant speed state. A constant speed pattern for continuing to rotate the reel accelerated to the constant speed state and a stop pattern for stopping the reel rotating in the predetermined constant speed state in a predetermined number of steps are included.

In each excitation pattern, the excitation state (excitation, non-excitation) of each excitation phase of the reel motor is determined for each number of steps from the reference position of the reel, and the excitation and non-excitation of the excitation state of the reel motor are stepped. By switching to the excitation state defined in the order of numbers, the rotation of the reel can be controlled to a predetermined rotation mode, and the main control unit 41 is a reel motor for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. After setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern of, by switching the excitation pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is possible to start the rotation of the reel in the stopped state and perform start control to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. By repeatedly setting the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, it is possible to perform constant speed rotation control to maintain the rotation of the reel at the constant speed rotation, and for the reel on which the stop switch is operated, By switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to a stop pattern at a predetermined timing, it is possible to perform rotation stop control for stopping the reel at a predetermined stop position according to the timing at which the stop switch is operated.

Further, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is updated according to the number of steps for exciting the reel motor, and is initialized every time the reel reference position is detected, so that each reel 2L, 2C, A step number counter for counting the number of steps after the reel reference position is detected for 2R is provided, and the value of the step number counter for the rotating reel is the predetermined number of steps (at least one reel makes one revolution). The number of steps is set to be larger than the 336 steps required for the purpose, for example, 400 steps) or more, the main control unit 41 determines that a rotation abnormality has occurred in the reel, and the relevant reel It is possible to reset the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the starting pattern, change the exciting state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern, and restart the rotation of the reel.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37A, the main control unit 41 sets a start pattern as an excitation pattern for each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R as the game start operation is performed. , The rotation of each reel is started by changing the exciting state of each exciting phase of each reel motor in the stopped state based on the starting pattern. Further, when setting the start pattern as the excitation pattern, the step number counter is initialized to start counting the number of steps. Then, by switching the excitation pattern from the starting pattern to the constant speed pattern, the rotation of the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel reference position is detected by making at least one revolution of the reel before the step number counter reaches the above-mentioned predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). It will be. Then, for all the rotating reels, the activation pattern of the reel motor is switched to the constant speed pattern, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the activation condition for enabling the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reels Judge that it was established. With the establishment of this activation condition, the main control unit 41 activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in this state, so that the corresponding reel The stop operation of the above is effectively accepted, and the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel is started.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 37B, after the main control unit 41 starts the rotation of each of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32 in the stopped state, the reel reference position is set for at least one of the reels. When the number of steps counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) without being detected, that is, the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position is required for the reel to make one revolution. If the number of steps exceeds the number of steps, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, restart control is performed, and the excitation pattern of the reel motor is set as the starting pattern again for the reel. The excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the beginning of the starting pattern to restart the rotation. Further, when performing restart control, the step number counter is initialized. After that, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for validating the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 Activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the activation condition is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs for an extremely short time. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slips, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step count counter has a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400). Step) is exceeded, that is, when the number of steps since the previous reel reference position was detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the main control unit 41 states that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel. Judging, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels. Then, for the reel for which the reel reference position is not detected and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed, and the reel motor is excited again from the beginning of the starting pattern. By changing the state, the rotation of the reel is restarted. After that, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps after the change of the excitation state of the reel motor is started again by the starting pattern. It will be. Then, for all the rotating reels, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected, so that the condition for validating the acceptance of the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 activates the acceptance of the stop operation of the rotating reel when the activation condition is satisfied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, in a state where at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, a momentary power failure occurs for an extremely short time. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or slips, the reel does not rotate normally, the reel reference position is not detected, and the step count counter has a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400). If the number exceeds step), the main control unit 41 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of the reel, invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels, and the reel reference position is not detected. The step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed. Then, when the reel for which the restart control is performed does not rotate normally and the step number counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the step number counter is initialized again and the restart control is repeated. After that, if the reel reference position is not detected before the step count counter reaches the predetermined number of steps even though the restart control is performed up to three times in succession for the reel. All the reels that are rotating are stopped, and error control that controls the error state is started to disable the progress of the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a backup storage area capable of holding the stored contents by being supplied with electric power by the backup power supply, and the power failure is generated based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48. When it is detected, the control state of the main control unit 41 is stored in the backup storage area, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state at the time when the power failure is detected is restored. Can be done. Then, when at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the reception of the stop operation is enabled for the reel and a power failure is detected, the control state of each reel is set. Data including the rotation state, the excitation pattern of each reel motor, etc. are stored in the backup storage area.

Then, when the main control unit 41 recovers from the power failure by restarting the power supply to the slot machine 1, the power failure is detected based on the control state stored in the backup storage area. For reels that were in a rotating state at that time, the excitation pattern at the time when power failure is detected is set as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, while for each reel, the enabled state or invalid state of accepting the stop operation is electric. Regardless of the state before the disconnection, it returns as an invalid state. After that, various controls will be performed based on the control state reset at the time of recovery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), the main control unit 41 controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and the electric power is generated in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a constant speed pattern is set as the excitation pattern at the time of the power failure, but the device returns in a state in which the acceptance of the stop operation is invalid. After that, by starting the rotation control of the reel, the excitation state of the corresponding reel motor is changed based on the constant speed pattern which is the excitation pattern set at the time of return. As a result, when the reel is rotated normally, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) for the rotating reel, so that the reel of the reel is rotated normally. The condition for validating the acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied. Then, when the condition for enabling the acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied for all the rotating reels, the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled for all the rotating reels. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in this state, the stop operation is effectively accepted and the stop control of the corresponding reel is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the rotation control of the reel was started according to the constant speed pattern set at the time of recovery from the power failure, but the torque of the reel motor was insufficient and the reel did not rotate normally. In that case, the number of steps counter exceeds the predetermined number of steps without detecting the reel reference position for the reel. In such a case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the rotational state of the reel, and for the reel, the step count counter is initialized and restart control is performed to set the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the starting pattern. Is set again to, and the reel rotation is restarted by changing the excitation state of the reel motor from the beginning of the starting pattern. After that, by performing the restart control, the reel is rotated normally, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern for all the rotating reels, and the reel reference position is detected, so that the stop operation is performed. When the activation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the rotating reels is enabled. On the other hand, when the reels are not rotated normally and the reels are not rotated normally even though the restart control is continuously performed up to 3 times, all the rotating reels are stopped and an error occurs. Starts error control to control the state and disables the progress of the game.

Further, the main control unit 41 detects the reel reference position for the other reels when the step number counter for any of the reels exceeds a predetermined number of steps while the plurality of reels are rotating. Regardless of whether or not the number of steps counter exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the reels are sequentially restarted from the reels. For example, the reels rotate at different timings for a plurality of reels. Even if an abnormality occurs in the state, the reels for which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined first are restarted in sequence without waiting for the reels for which the abnormality in the rotation state is determined to be restarted.

After starting the rotation of the reels, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects the reel reference position and the constant speed rotation for all the rotating reels, and when the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied. , While enabling the acceptance of stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for all rotating reels, the reel reference position is detected for at least one reel after the reel rotation is started. If the number of steps since the start of rotation specified based on the number of steps counter or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds the predetermined number of steps exceeding one lap of the reel without being performed, the reel It is now judged that an abnormality has occurred in the rotation state of.

In such a configuration, if an abnormality occurs in the reel rotation state even once, it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal, and if the error state is controlled to disable the progress of the game, the reel is temporarily disabled. Even in a situation where the reel can be rotated normally only after the rotation of the reel is delayed, the progress of the game is disabled, which hinders the smooth progress of the game. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after the reel rotation is started, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels and the reel is shifted to constant speed rotation, and the condition for enabling the stop operation is In the established situation, when a reel rotation abnormality is determined, restart control is performed to restart the reel by changing the exciting state of the reel motor again according to the starting pattern which is the exciting pattern at the time of reel starting. Every time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, since the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated during the period from the determination of the rotation abnormality to the establishment of the condition for enabling the stop operation after the restart control is performed, the reel is not rotated normally. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the above from being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the power supply is restarted and the power supply is restored after the power supply is stopped due to the power interruption in the state where the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied, the control state before the power failure is obtained. The control to change the excitation state of the reel motor will be restarted from, but after that, if the normal rotation is specified by detecting the reel reference position, the acceptance of the stop operation will be enabled from that time. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, if the normal rotation of the rotating reel is maintained, the power supply can be restarted and the game can be advanced immediately.

In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied, the torque for rotating the reel is insufficient and the reel is not rotated, resulting in a rotation abnormality. Even if it is determined, the restart control is performed for the reel, and the progress of the game is not immediately disabled, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, in such a case, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels after the reel rotation abnormality is determined and the restart control is performed from the time when the power supply is restarted. In the period until the activation condition is satisfied by shifting to constant speed rotation, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated, so after the power supply is restarted, the reel is in a situation where it is unknown whether the reel is in normal rotation. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the above from being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected and the rotation of the reel shifts to the constant speed rotation, so that it is determined that the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied, and the reel has a constant speed. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the rotating reel from being executed by the stop operation even though the rotation has not been reached.

Further, in this embodiment, after the restart control for changing the excitation state of the reel motor according to the excitation pattern at the time of starting, the restart control is performed when the reel reference position is not detected and the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied. Is repeatedly executed, and if the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even if the restart control is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the error state is controlled and the game is disabled. , If the reel does not rotate normally even by the restart control, that is, if the problem cannot be solved by the restart control, the game can be disabled.

Further, in this embodiment, when a rotation abnormality is determined in a plurality of reels at different timings in a state where the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, restart control is sequentially performed from the reel in which the rotation abnormality is determined. Even if rotation abnormalities are determined at different timings on a plurality of reels, each reel can be set to normal rotation at the earliest possible stage.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 determines a rotation abnormality in a plurality of reels at different timings while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the reels for which the rotation abnormality is determined are sequentially re-started. The configuration is such that start control is performed. For example, when a rotation abnormality of any of the reels is determined, the operation is repeated until a period (a period for a predetermined number of steps) in which the rotation abnormality of the remaining reels can be determined elapses. A configuration that delays the start control, that is, when a rotation abnormality is determined at different timings on a plurality of reels while the stop operation activation condition is satisfied, the restart control of the reel for which the rotation abnormality is determined earliest is performed. It may be configured to delay until the restart control of the reel for which the rotation abnormality is determined to be the latest, and with such a configuration, even if the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels, the rotation abnormality will occur. Since a plurality of determined reels can be restarted at the same timing, the appearance at the time of restart is improved.

Further, in this embodiment, when the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position exceeds a predetermined number of steps (400 steps) exceeding one reel lap without detecting the reel reference position. , The configuration is such that the rotation abnormality of the reel is specified, but the predetermined number of steps is a value larger than the number of steps required for the reel to make one revolution, that is, the reel reference position is detected when the reel is rotating normally. The value may be larger than the number of steps required to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, control is performed to restart the reel when the number of steps since the start of rotation or the previous detection of the reel reference position exceeds a predetermined number without detecting the reel reference position. If the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even after performing a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal and the game is disabled, but the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied. If the reel is not restarted at least once, it is possible to prevent the game from being frequently disabled.

Further, in this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected after the start of rotation, and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled by shifting to the constant speed rotation, but at least the reel reference position is detected. Any configuration may be used as long as the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled by.

Further, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to the constant speed depending on whether the number of steps from the start of the reel rotation is equal to or greater than the number of steps required to shift to the constant speed rotation. However, by determining whether or not a constant speed is satisfied based on the number of steps or time until the reel reference position is detected and the next reel reference position is detected, it is determined whether or not the rotation has shifted to a constant speed rotation. It may be configured to judge.

Next, the control related to the navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment using the game auxiliary display 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 41, the game auxiliary display 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and each segment can be turned on in red. It is a vessel. Each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in the predetermined output buffer provided on the game control board 40, thereby driving the predetermined lighting mode. It is controlled to be on or off in. As the game auxiliary display 12, a display, a liquid crystal display, or the like capable of lighting each segment in any one color such as white, pink, yellow, orange, red, green, and blue, or a plurality of colors is provided. You may use it.

By setting the navigation notification display data as lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, the main control unit 41 can display the navigation number on the game assistance display 12 and perform navigation notification. .. Further, by setting the payout number display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer, it is possible to notify the payout number number to display the number of medals given by the occurrence of the winning on the game auxiliary display 12. By setting error display data as lighting mode data in the buffer, it is possible to perform error notification for displaying the error code indicating the content of the error on the game auxiliary display 12.

In the predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, a number, a lighting mode data for displaying a predetermined alphabet individually on one display constituting the game auxiliary display 12, and a predetermined symbol together with the number (this implementation). In the example, the lighting mode data for displaying ".") Is stored in the lighting mode data table defined for each content to be displayed. Further, in the lighting mode data table, a number is assigned in advance for each lighting mode data, and one number is set so as to correspond to one lighting mode data. Then, when the main control unit 41 sets the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 puts the corresponding display in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c provided corresponding to the displays 12L and 12R. By setting a number corresponding to the display content to be displayed and executing the display data storage process, the display 12L and 12R are displayed with the predetermined content by the lighting mode data corresponding to the number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is possible. As a result, the number corresponding to the lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table can be specified in the case of performing the navigation notification, the notification of the number of payouts, and the case of the error notification. Using the common lighting mode data, it is possible to display a predetermined display content on each of the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary indicator 12.

Further, in the display data storage process, the number of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, the lighting mode data corresponding to the number is specified from the lighting mode data table, and the specified lighting mode data is used as the navigation notification display data and the number of payouts. The display data and error display data are stored in the output buffer of the display corresponding to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. As a result, each segment of the corresponding display is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in the output buffer, so that a predetermined display content is displayed. In the main control unit 41, data for designating the lighting mode (lighting or extinguishing) of each segment of the display (8-bit data in which each bit indicates the lighting mode, for example, "00000001" ("1" is lit) By storing (data that only one segment corresponding to the rightmost bit) is stored in the output buffer of the corresponding display, the lighting mode data is displayed without executing the display data storage process. It is also possible to store the display directly in the output buffer of the device and display the display based on the lighting mode data, and even if the lighting mode is not set in the lighting mode data table, the indicators 12L and 12R It is possible to display it.

When the internal lottery is performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and one of the special combinations (BB1 to RB) is won. Whether or not the execution condition of the navigation notification of the predetermined special role (in this embodiment, it is established by performing a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) after the winning of the special role) is satisfied. When the determination is made and the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, a flag indicating that the navigation notification is performed when the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , Performs the above-mentioned push order command setting process. The flag is referred to in the push order command setting process, and is after the execution condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied, and the timing at which the winning special role can be won, that is, inside. When the result of the lottery is out of order, the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the symbols constituting the winning special combination are set as the transmission navigation numbers.

Then, after the push order command setting process is completed, the lighting mode data setting process of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. In the setting process of the lighting mode data of the game auxiliary display 12, if the special combination is not won or the implementation condition is not satisfied, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the push order command transmission process described above. , Refer to the transmission navigation numbers (“0” to “9”) that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification, and set the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number in the output buffer. On the other hand, when the special combination is elected and the implementation conditions are satisfied, it is set by the push order command transmission process, and a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification (in this embodiment, "blue 7"). Refer to the transmission navigation numbers ("10" to "13") that can identify the "red 7", "white 7", and "BAR" symbols, and select the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number. And set it in the output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when the main control unit 41 sets the navigation notification display data, the navigation number is the standard pressing order number “0”, and when the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation notification display is displayed. By setting the initial value of the output buffer as data, that is, by initializing the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and setting all the first to eighth segments of each display 12L and 12R to the off state, the game assistance is provided. The display 12 is controlled to be hidden. In addition, the navigation number is any of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" other than the standard pressing order, and when the navigation notification is performed, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is lit so as to display the number of the navigation number. By setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer to turn on the 8th segment of the display 12R and turn off the other segments, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. To control. In addition, when the special role is elected and the implementation conditions are satisfied, if the navigation notification display data including the navigation number suggesting the design corresponding to the special role is selected, the number of the navigation number is selected. The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on, the eighth segment of the display 12R is turned on, and the other segments are turned off. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the navigation number.

As a result, the segment that lights up in each stop order (left middle right, left and right middle, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop) By different combinations of, the navigation number is displayed so that it can be identified from the combination of the lit segments, and as a navigation notification, the stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result is provided as a game assistance. It is possible to make a notification using the display 12. In addition, if the special role has been won and the implementation conditions have been met, the navigation number suggests a pattern (blue 7, red 7, white 7, BAR) according to the winning special role. By displaying ("10" to "13") in a recognizable manner, a predetermined symbol is suggested as the timing of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and a special role can be won as a navigation notification. The timing of the possible stop operation can be notified by using the game auxiliary display 12. Further, the main control unit 41 controls the 8th segment main of the display 12R to be lit together with the navigation number when performing the navigation notification, while the 8th segment main of the display 12R is turned off when the navigation notification is not performed. By controlling to, it is possible to recognize whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12.

In the navigation notification of this embodiment, the combination of segments corresponding to the navigation number is lit so that the display mode of the game assistance display 12 is the navigation number. However, the game assistance display 12 is used as the navigation notification. The display mode may be a display mode that directly indicates the stop order (for example, modification 1 of FIG. 43), is not a display mode that directly recalls the stop order, and is a lit segment. It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order from the combination of the above, and the display mode may not be easily identified without a correspondence table or the like (for example, modification 2 of FIG. 43).

Specifically, as shown as a modification 1 in FIG. 43, for example, the reel number of the left reel 2L is "1", the reel number of the middle reel 2C is "2", and the reel number of the right reel 2R is "3". By displaying the reel number of the first stop on the display 12L of one of the two game auxiliary indicators 12 and displaying the reel number of the second stop on the other indicator 12R (game auxiliary indicator). By displaying, for example, "21" on 12, it is shown that the stop order is middle, left, and right), the stop order is directly suggested as a navigation notification, and the design of blue 7 is "b7", red. By displaying these "b7", "r7", "S7", and "br" on the game auxiliary display 12, the symbol of 7 is "r7", the symbol of white 7 is "S7", and the symbol of BAR is "br". By suggesting the symbols of blue 7, red 7, white 7, and BAR, the stop timing can be directly suggested.

Further, as shown as a modification 2 in FIG. 43, a display is used as a combination of segments in which it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order in advance in the stop order (for example, as a combination of segments suggesting a stop order in the left, middle, and right). It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order by allocating the 2nd segment of 12L, the 4th and 6th segment combinations of the display 12R, etc.) and turning on the corresponding segment, but the correspondence table etc. is used. The stop order can be suggested by the display mode that can be identified by the above.

When the game progresses and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not any of the winning combinations has been won, and pays out. If any of the accompanying wins (small wins) has been won, the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of the winning is set in the output buffer as the payout number display data, and is paid out to the game auxiliary display 12. Display the number of medals to be played.

As shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so as to display the payout number of medals, and the eighth By setting the payout number display data that turns off the other segments including the segment in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the payout number of medals. For example, when eight medals are paid out, the first to seventh segments of the display 12R are turned on, while the first to eighth segments of the display 12L and the eighth segment of the display 12R are turned off. As a result, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the eighth segment of the display 12R is controlled to be in the off state, so that the lighting mode in the navigation notification and the number of medals to be paid out are as described above. The lighting mode is different from the lighting mode in the notification of, so that it is not misunderstood whether the navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary display 12 or the number of medals to be paid out is notified. There is.

When an error is detected during the progress of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a predetermined error code (E1 to E8, see FIG. 44) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the type of the error. When the setting and the predetermined error display condition described later are satisfied (in this embodiment, when an error is detected during the rotation control of the reels, it is when all the reels are stopped, and the rotation control of the reels is in progress. When an error is detected at a time other than the above, the error display data including the error code set in the RAM 41c is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12.

As shown in FIG. 44, when setting the error display data, the main control unit 41 turns on each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 so as to display the letters and numbers of the error code, and the other segments. By setting the error display data in the output buffer to turn off the error, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display an error code that can identify the type of the detected error. Then, when a predetermined error release condition (see FIG. 44) is satisfied, the output buffer is initialized and the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. In the error display data, by lighting the first, second, fourth, fifth, and seventh segments of the display 12L, the character "E" is displayed and the number corresponding to the error code number in the segment of the display 12R is displayed. While turning on the segment, the other segments of the indicators 12L and 12R are turned off. As a result, when displaying the error code on the game auxiliary display 12, the lighting mode is controlled so that the alphabetic character "E", which is not displayed in the navigation notification or the payout number display, is displayed on the display 12L. Therefore, the lighting mode when notifying the error code is different from the lighting mode in the navigation notification and the lighting mode in the notification of the number of payout medals, and is the error code notified by the game auxiliary display 12? , Navi notification, and notification of the number of medals to be paid out are not misunderstood.

Next, the timing at which the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 according to the progress of the game or the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48.

As shown in FIG. 45A, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game assistance display 12 when a bet number of 1 or more is set to start the game, and displays the game assistance display. All segments of the device 12 are turned off and controlled to be hidden. Then, when the start operation is performed with the specified number of bets set, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. At this time, the navigation number "0" in the standard pressing order is set with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the navigation notification is not performed, all the segments of the game auxiliary display 12 are turned off. maintain. Then, when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped after the operation of the third stop is performed, if any of the small wins has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by the winning. Is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, when a bet number of 1 or more is set to start the next game, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized again, and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden from the time when the number of bets of 1 or more is set to the time when the payout of medals is started by winning. , From the time when all reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started, the number of bets of 1 or more is set, or the waiting condition (no operation for a certain period of time, settlement operation is performed). That) is established and the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as the payout number display over the period until the transition to the standby state is established. When the third stop operation is performed and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the re-game combination has won a prize or if neither prize has occurred, the game assistance By not setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the display 12, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is kept hidden, and one or more bets are set in order to start one game. The lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden from time to the time when the bet number is set to start the next game, that is, for the entire period in one game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), when the main control unit 41 performs the navigation notification, the reel 2L related to the game is performed after the start operation is performed with the specified number of bets set. When starting the rotation control of 2, 2C and 2R, one of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" is set as the transmission navigation number by the above-mentioned push order command transmission process with reference to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If, or if the conditions for implementing the special role navigation notification are satisfied and any of the navigation numbers "10" to "13" is set as the transmission navigation number, the corresponding navigation number is used. The navigation notification display data to be displayed is set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12, and the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12. After that, the stop switch of the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. Then, it waits for a predetermined waiting period. Then, after the predetermined waiting period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not any of the small wins has been won, and if the small win has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by the winning is determined. It is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed for a period from the time when the rotation of the reel is started with the start of the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. It is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification. Then, when the output buffer is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is once controlled to be hidden, and then all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started. From the above, the number of medals is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display over the period from when one or more bets are set.

Further, as described above (see FIG. 38), the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. If it is determined that the rotating reel has an abnormality in the rotation state, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated for all reels, and the rotation is restarted for the reel that is determined to have an abnormality. Performs restart control. After that, when all the rotating reels are rotated normally, the acceptance of the stop operation is re-enabled. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45B, when the navigation notification is performed, the navigation notification is sent to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game is started. The display data is set, and then the output buffer is initialized when the stop switch of the third stop is released. As a result, when performing navigation notification, acceptance of the stop operation is effective in the period from the start of the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R related to the game to the time when the stop switch of the third stop is released. Regardless of whether it is disabled or disabled, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the main control unit 41 transmits the above-mentioned push order command to the sub control unit 91 when the game start operation is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the navigation number, it is specified based on the navigation number. A navigation effect that suggests an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at a position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, or a stop operation based on the navigation number is performed. An advantageous operation mode is suggested by displaying an image suggesting the timing (for example, an image of "red 7") in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51.

In this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 is configured to start the navigation effect when the push order command is received when performing the navigation effect, but the timing at which the navigation effect is started is the main. It may be before the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled on the control unit 41 side. For example, a reel acceleration information command indicating that the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate with the start of the game is received. Even if the timing is within the period from the reception of the push order command to the time before the acceleration completion command is received, which indicates that the control to accelerate the reel to the predetermined constant speed rotation is completed with the start of the game. good. In particular, when the stop operation is enabled, the navigation notification is started on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation effect is started on the sub control unit 91 side, so that the navigation notification is performed. Even in the state, during the period from the start operation to the activation of the stop operation, the navigation notification and the navigation effect do not suggest the winning of the notification target role, so that the internal information is provided during the period. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the winning role in the lottery. Further, in particular, by configuring the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side to be started after the reel rotation related to the game is started, for example. , The main control unit 41 controls the game to a freeze state that delays the progress of the game in the period from the start operation to the start of the reel rotation control related to the game, and the reel effect using the reel in the freeze state. In the case of a configuration in which the above is feasible, the notification target is notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect during the period from the start operation to the start of the reel rotation control related to the game, that is, the period controlled in the freeze state. Since the winning of the winning combination is not suggested, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the winning combination in the internal lottery during the period.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment ends the navigation notification when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released after starting the navigation notification, and issues a game end command to the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 is configured to transmit, and the sub-control unit 91 can end the navigation effect when the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side ends based on the reception of the game end command. , The navigation effect may be configured to be performed at least when the result of the game changes depending on the stop order. For example, the stop switch is operated in a stop order other than the stop order suggested by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. If it is confirmed that the notification target combination will not win, or if it is confirmed that only one combination will win by performing the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the main control unit 41 side The navigation effect may be terminated before the navigation notification is terminated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being continued even after the result of the game is confirmed.

The RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can retain the stored contents by being supplied with power by the backup power supply even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power failure is detected based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48, the control state of the main control unit 41 set in the RAM 41c is changed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started after the power interruption process is performed so that the power can be restored when the power is restored from the above, the control is started in the control state when the power interruption is detected. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the main control unit 41 rotates and controls at least one or more reels as the game progresses, and the game auxiliary display 12 is notified of the navigation, the power is cut off. When it is detected, the control related to the power failure is performed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and the rotation is controlled. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the control state including the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the reel, the number of steps of excitation control, the navigation number, etc. can be restored with the contents when the power failure is detected. Perform power failure processing so that it can be done.

After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure, it is stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. The control state before the power failure is restored based on the control state, but the state of accepting the stop operation by all the stop switches among the control states is changed to invalid and set. As a result, the main control unit 41 returns in a state in which acceptance of the stop operation by all the stop switches is invalidated.

Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the control state to the state before the power failure, the navigation number, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of each reel and the number of steps are stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. Restore the contents as they were. Then, when returning, the control state on the main control unit 41 side including the return command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure and the push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is displayed. Various identifiable commands are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. After that, the same control as at the start of the game is executed, and the control for advancing the game is performed based on the control state set in the RAM 41c, based on the navigation number set in the RAM 41c. The navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after controlling to restart the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the excitation pattern of the reel motor set in the RAM 41c, that is, Based on the constant speed pattern, the reel motor of the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure is excited from the number of steps of the excitation pattern when the power failure is detected, and the corresponding reel is rotated at the predetermined constant speed again. It is controlled to rotate, and when the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed rotation, control is performed to enable acceptance of a stop operation by the stop switch of the corresponding reel.

At this time, in the control of rotating the corresponding reel again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, the rotation control of the corresponding reel motor is performed based on the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern set at the time when the power failure is detected. In such a case, the reel is normally rotated depending on the state of the reel (rotated state or stopped state) as described above (see FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)). In some cases, it may not rotate normally, and if it does not rotate normally, restart control is performed to rotate the corresponding reel normally.

Then, when the reel is rotated normally or is not rotated normally and the reel is rotated normally by the restart control, and the reel reaches a predetermined constant speed rotation, the corresponding reel is used. Enables the acceptance of stop operations by the stop switch of. After that, it waits until the stop switch for which acceptance is enabled is operated, and when the stop switch is operated, it controls to stop the corresponding reel.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 receives the return command after recovering from the power failure, and then receives the push order command, so that the sub control unit 91 is based on the navigation number specified by the push order command. When it can be specified that the navigation notification is performed on the 41 side, the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player based on the navigation number is restarted. After that, the production is controlled based on various commands received according to the progress of the game. As a result, the main control unit 41 recovers from the power failure, transmits a push order command, etc., then restarts the reel rotation control, and the corresponding reel rotates at a constant speed, so that the stop operation is performed by the stop switch. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 restarts the navigation effect when the push order command is received after returning from the power failure, so that the sub control unit 91 is the main control unit 41. When the stop operation is enabled on the side, it is possible to assume that the navigation effect has already been performed.

As described above, when the power failure is detected, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and controls the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden. During the period from the time when the above is detected until the power supply to the slot machine 1 is completely stopped, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Further, when a power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and when the main control unit 41 returns, a navigation notification is displayed on the output buffer. Since the data is controlled to be reset, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period from the time when the power supply is restarted to the time when the main control unit 41 is restored. It has become like.

Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the main control unit 41 returns, the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and then resets the navigation notification display data. When a power failure is detected, the reel that was in rotation control is controlled to rotate again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, and when the corresponding reel reaches a constant speed rotation, a stop operation by the stop switch of the reel is performed. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, the game auxiliary display 12 starts to display the navigation number by the navigation notification, and then stops by the stop switch. The acceptance of operations is enabled, and the acceptance of stop operations is enabled while the navigation number is already displayed.

Further, the main control unit 41 detects a power failure while controlling the rotation of the reel, and then, when recovering from the power failure, executes the same process as at the start of the game and is set at the time of recovery. The progress of the game is controlled based on the control state.

As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls the game and a sub control unit 91 that controls the effect, and the main control unit 41 is controlled by the main control unit 41 side. The game auxiliary display 12 is configured to be capable of performing navigation notification to notify an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

In such a configuration, if a power failure occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is performing the navigation notification, the navigation notification will be performed even after the power failure is restored. If the stop operation is enabled before the navigation notification is restored, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the advantageous operation mode to be notified.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of performing navigation notification for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Yes, after starting the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation notification is being performed, during the period from the restart of the power supply to the establishment of the predetermined activation condition. , The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not accepted, the navigation notification is restarted by the game auxiliary display 12, and the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted after the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the stop switch 8L, during the period from the restart of the power supply to the establishment of the activation condition, Since the stop operation by the 8C and 8R is not accepted, it is possible to prevent the reels 2L, 2C and 2R from being stopped in a situation where it is unknown whether the normal rotation is performed after the power supply is restarted. In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, the timing is earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the navigation notification is restarted at, the stop switches 8L, 8C are mistakenly used in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without the player knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified by the navigation notification. , 8R can be prevented from being operated.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 to the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of a small winning combination and the error that has occurred. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with a navigation number capable of identifying an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player as a display content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, a new display is made by displaying the navigation number using a display means for displaying a predetermined content. The predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed without providing any means.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed. Then, when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, after restarting the navigation notification, the rotation of the reel that was controlling the rotation when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped is rotated. The control is restarted, and after the power supply is restarted, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the same display mode as when the power supply is stopped, regardless of the stopped state of the reel. Since the advantageous operation mode is notified, it is possible to simplify the control related to the resumption of the control for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets a plurality of different operation timings (“blue 7”, “red 7”, “white 7”, and “BAR” as a winning line as an advantageous operation mode for the player. An operation mode for operating at one of the operation timings (timing at which the LN is stopped), and an operation mode for operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders (for example, left middle right, left and right middle operation order, etc.) , The configuration is such that the navigation notification is used, but the operation mode and the like may be notified by a combination of these.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after starting the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode for the player. Since the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted in this state, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after the start of the game, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the operation mode has been notified.

In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 starts the rotation control of the reel with the start of the game, the main control unit 41 starts the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode for the player, and then enables the predetermined activation. The configuration is such that the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted when the conditions are satisfied, but the navigation notification may be started after the start of the game until the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. For example, the navigation notification may be started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, or a predetermined effect may be obtained from the time when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The navigation notification may be started at any timing within the period until the conversion condition is satisfied. Even in such a configuration, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is satisfied after the start of the game, so that the player is not aware of the advantageous operation mode being notified. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode.

After the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment invalidates the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel, and determines again. When the activation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, and after the navigation notification is started, even when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel, the navigation is performed. Since the notification of the advantageous operation mode is continued by the notification, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are erroneously operated in the operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode is notified to the player. It can be prevented from being lost.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can transmit a push order command capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player to the sub control unit 91, whereas the sub control unit 91 has a push order. It is possible to execute a navigation effect that can specify an advantageous operation mode based on a command, and when the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side, the liquid crystal display 51 controlled by the sub control unit 91 side is used. Since it is possible to notify the advantageous operation mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the advantageous operation mode is notified.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped after the activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is performed, and then the power supply is restarted to perform the main control. When the unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, the navigation notification is restarted, the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and then the rotation control of the reel is started to enable a predetermined value. When the condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. Therefore, the push order command that can specify the advantageous operation mode at an earlier timing than the activation condition is satisfied is the sub-control unit 91. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 starts the navigation effect before the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode has been notified.

In this embodiment, since the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the power failure is detected when the control state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure. It is configured to return to the control state before the power failure based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c at times. In particular, for the reel whose rotation control was performed before the power failure, the reel motor at the time of the power failure It is designed to recover with the excitation pattern and the number of steps set, and when recovering from the power failure, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of the power failure, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps. After controlling to restart the rotation of the reel, if the reel does not rotate normally, the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel is reset to the starting pattern and the restart control is performed to restart the rotation. However, when the main control unit 41 is in a state where one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power failure and the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted, the control state before the power failure is restored. May be configured to set the excitation pattern of the reel motor as the starting pattern for the corresponding reel.

Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of the start pattern, the constant speed pattern, and the stop pattern when controlling the normal game. FIG. 47. As shown in (a), the starting pattern was selected on condition that the effective start switch 7 was operated, and the reel in the stopped state was started and accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, in this state, the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on the condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated is selected as a stop pattern according to the number of sliding frames, and the stop switch is operated. The reel is stopped at the stop position according to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in this embodiment). After that, in the configuration in which the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started and keeps the reel in the stopped state, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the start pattern before the power failure. When the reel is stopped in the middle of starting due to power failure, the starting pattern selected at the time of power failure is used when recovering from power failure. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, the reel can be started without temporarily causing the reel to rotate normally.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the rotation of the reel is controlled by a constant speed pattern before the power failure, and when the reel is stopped during the start due to the power failure, the reel is stopped from the power failure. When returning, the exciting pattern is changed from the constant speed pattern selected at the time of power failure to the starting pattern, and the excited state is changed from the first step of the starting pattern, so that the reel is not rotated normally once. The reel can be started without the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the rotation of the reel is controlled to be stopped by a stop pattern before the power failure, and when the reel is stopped during the control to stop due to the power failure, When recovering from a power failure, the stop pattern selected at the time of the power failure is used, and the excitation state is changed from the number of steps at the time of the power failure in the stop pattern, so that the stop pattern executed at the time of the power failure can be changed. By continuously executing, the stop pattern that was executed at the time of power failure is executed to the end within a specific time (190 ms in this embodiment) excluding the time during power failure after starting before power failure. Can be done.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can detect the occurrence of various errors related to the game such as an error related to medal payout, an error related to medal insertion, and an error related to reel rotation in the main process and the timer interrupt process (main). When a predetermined error display condition is satisfied after detecting various errors as described above, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The predetermined error display condition is when various errors are detected when the reels are not rotation-controlled due to the game, and various errors are detected when the reels are rotation-controlled. The case is when all reels are stopped.

As shown in FIG. 48, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 at the start of the game as described above, performs the navigation notification, and then performs the navigation notification. 3 When a predetermined waiting period elapses from the time when the stop switch in which the stop operation is performed is released, the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning situation is used as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. It is configured to display the number of medals to be paid out. In such a configuration, from the time when the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is started, the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed is released, and a predetermined standby is further performed. If various errors related to the game, especially errors related to inserting medals and errors related to reel rotation, are detected during the time limit until the period elapses, control related to the game is continued until the above time limit elapses. Control to set the error code indicating the content of the detected error in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as error display data and display the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when the time limit elapses. After starting, control to the error state.

After that, when the release condition (for example, the operation of the reset switch 23 in the predetermined procedure) is satisfied according to the type of the detected abnormality, the control of the game is restarted from the time before the control of the error state is started. .. By resuming the control of the game, it is determined whether or not the control after the third stop operation is performed and a predetermined periodic period has elapsed, that is, whether or not any of the small wins has been won, and the small When a winning combination has occurred, the number of medals paid out by winning is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Let me.

As described above, when various errors are detected in the state where the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and performs the navigation notification, By setting error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the navigation notification is completed and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the error notification is performed in the period from the start to the end of the navigation notification. Is designed to limit what is done.

A conventional slot machine includes a main control unit that controls the progress of a game and a sub-control unit that controls the production. A game auxiliary display capable of displaying an error code indicating the content thereof is provided, and a command capable of identifying the internal lottery result can be transmitted to the sub control unit. According to the internal lottery result specified based on the command, an operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like provided in the sub control unit to notify the player.

In such a configuration, an advantageous operation mode cannot be specified due to a defect in the sub control unit or the liquid crystal display, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 side In addition to controlling the display of the advantageous operation mode in the above, the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player is used to display the advantageous operation mode. Assuming that the number of medals to be paid out and the operation mode advantageous for the player are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41, the number of medals to be paid out to the player on one display and the player can use it. Since both of the advantageous operation modes are displayed, there is a risk that the displayed contents may be misunderstood when the display at that time is switched.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the number of medals to be paid out to the player as predetermined contents and an error code indicating the contents when an error related to the game occurs. The display 12 is provided, and the game auxiliary display 12 can display a navigation number capable of identifying an advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch which is advantageous for the player as a display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily initialized to the hidden state. Since the predetermined content is displayed, when the navigation number is displayed on the display directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, the game auxiliary display that displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content without providing a new display means. By displaying the navigation number using 12, both the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed, and when the predetermined content is displayed after the navigation number is displayed on the game assistance display 12, the game assistance is displayed. Since the display content of the display 12 is once initialized to be hidden and then the predetermined content is displayed, it is misunderstood whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. It can be prevented from being stored.

When the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the main control unit 41 temporarily initializes the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 and hides it. The configuration may be such that the predetermined content is displayed after the state of the above, and the period during which the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden may be at least a period during which the player or the like can recognize that the lights have been turned off. In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 provides a predetermined waiting period for waiting after initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the predetermined content When displaying the number of medals to be paid out, the game auxiliary display 12 is surely controlled to be hidden.

Further, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed during the predetermined waiting period. The mode may be a period during which the player or the like can recognize that the lights have been turned off at least while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts. For example, the timer interrupt process (main) is waited for at least once. By doing so, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched. Therefore, while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts, the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily turned on. It can be controlled to the off state. Further, for example, when the stop switch of the third stop is operated and the stop switch is released, the timer is operated and the timer measures the passage of a predetermined standby time. By waiting for the waiting period, the game auxiliary display 12 may be temporarily controlled to be turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the notification of the number of payouts.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment outputs a buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the stop switch of the third stop is operated when the navigation notification is performed by the game auxiliary display 12. By setting the payout number display data in the output buffer after initializing once, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be temporarily turned off while the navigation notification is switched to the payout number notification. However, while switching from the navigation notification to the notification of the number of payouts, by displaying a display not related to the game (for example, "-" or "_"), the display contents of the navigation notification and the notification of the number of payouts are displayed. It is possible to prevent the content from being mistaken for the content.

Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment temporarily initializes the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 when displaying the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12. By setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to display the number of medals paid out, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are temporarily initialized. When setting the payout number display data, by setting the data to display the total number of medals to be paid out with the winning of the small winning combination, it is completed after the medal payout is started. The total number of medals to be paid out is displayed over the period until the medals are paid out. However, when the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. After setting the data to display 0 medals as, each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated to the total number of paid medals, and the payout is made. The total number of completed medals may be sequentially displayed, and finally, the total number of medals paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination may be controlled to be displayed. Even in such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and then the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as a predetermined content, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By initializing the contents once and setting the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, whether the display contents displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are navigation numbers or predetermined contents. Can be prevented from being misidentified.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, 0 sheets are shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set. Then, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data may be controlled to be updated so as to be added one by one. With such a configuration, the period from the start of payout of medals due to the winning of a small role until the payout of the first medal is detected, that is, the number of medals paid out is 0. For a certain period, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, and then the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed from the time when the payout of the first medal is detected, and the total number of medals for which the payout is completed is displayed. When the numbers are sequentially displayed, that is, when the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as a predetermined content after displaying the navigation number on the game assistance display 12, the navigation number is displayed as the display content of the game assistance display 12. After the display, the number of medals to be paid out will be displayed once the display is hidden, and the same effect as the configuration of this embodiment will be obtained, and the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 will be displayed. It is possible to prevent the navigation number or the predetermined content from being misidentified.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation notification is completed and the predetermined waiting period elapses, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data. Data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set, and then, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is controlled to be updated so as to be added by 1. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the period from the end of the navigation notification to the elapse of the predetermined waiting time and the initial data of the payout number display data are set, and the payout sensor 34c is used to obtain the first medal. The display of the game assistance display 12 can be hidden during the period from the detection of the payout to the update of the payout number display data, and the same effect as the configuration of this embodiment is obtained, and the game assistance is achieved. It is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the display 12 from being misidentified as whether it is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed by initializing the navigation notification display data when the third stop operation is performed. Is temporarily hidden, and when a predetermined waiting period elapses after the navigation notification display data is initialized, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. The data may be set, and then the payout number display data may be updated so as to be added by 1 each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. With such a configuration, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is completed, and the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data to the elapse of a predetermined waiting time. From the time when the initial data of the payout number display data is set to the period from the time when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated, the game auxiliary display 12 The display can be hidden, and the same effect as the configuration of this embodiment is obtained, and it is misidentified whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content. It is possible to prevent it from being done. It should be noted that these periods, that is, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is completed, and the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data to the elapse of a predetermined waiting time, are paid out. By applying only one of the periods from the time when the initial data of the number of medals display data is set until the payout of the first medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c and the number of medals to be paid out is updated. , After displaying the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, it may be temporarily hidden and the number of medals paid out may be displayed, or any two of these periods may be set. It may be a configuration to be applied.

Further, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration of controlling to update the display of the game auxiliary display 12, "1" to "9" can be displayed as the display mode of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation A part of the display mode (navigation numbers "1" to "13" and ".") In the notification is included in the display mode of the number of payouts, but the display mode in the navigation notification and the display mode of the number of payouts However, when the displays on the two indicators 12L and 12R are integrated, the display mode is different. For example, in the navigation notification, the eighth segment of the indicator 12R and the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the navigation number are used. In the payout number display, only the 1st to 7th segments of the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the payout number are turned on, so that the display contents of the navigation notification are displayed. It is possible to prevent the display content of the notification of the number of payouts from being misunderstood.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed after the start of the game, until the stop switch of the third stop operation is released. Since the game auxiliary display 12 continuously displays the navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player over the period of the game, the period from the start to the end of the game. It is possible to continuously make the player recognize an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the control of rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game, and starts the third stop operation at the end of the game. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the stop switch is released. However, as the game starts, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as the game progresses. The navigation number is continued to the game auxiliary display 12 for a period from one start timing until the operation of is effective to one end timing after the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as the end of the game. When the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are set at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game. When starting the rotation control, the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, for example, from the start timing of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R when the operation is enabled, as the end of the game. When, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, when the payout of medals is started or ended due to winning, or when the bet number setting operation is performed for the next game. The navigation number may be continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until the end timing of the game.

Among such configurations, in particular, one start timing is controlled to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed when the start switch 7 is operated with a specified number of bets set. By setting any of the above, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started before the operations of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R become effective. Further, one start timing is set to either when the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed is started, or when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. For example, in the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R at a predetermined constant speed, a reel effect of rotating the reel in a mode different from that of a normal game is performed. Even if the configuration is such that the game is performed or the game is controlled to a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined time, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started after the reel effect, the freeze state, or the like ends. It is possible to limit the display of the navigation number during the period when the reel effect is performed. Further, by setting one start timing to be when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, an event that occurs in the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, for example, Regardless of whether or not the above-mentioned reel effect or reel acceleration due to recovery from power failure occurs, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is started at a predetermined timing at the start of the game. be able to.

Further, in particular, by setting the end timing of one to the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, all reels 2L, 2C, from the time when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, thereafter. Since the display content on the game auxiliary display 12 can be hidden during the period from when 2R is stopped until the winning judgment is made, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out in connection with winning, the navigation system is used. It is possible to prevent the number and the number of payouts from being mistaken for each other.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is information about the result of the game as a predetermined content, and is used on the game auxiliary display 12 used to display the number of medals to be paid out to the player due to the occurrence of a prize at the end of the game. , The navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous for the player is displayed as the display content different from the predetermined content, and the stop switch that is advantageous for the player. While the advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game, the number of payouts as a predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, so that the display period of the navigation number and the display period of the number of payouts overlap on the game auxiliary display 12. You don't have to.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment displays on the game auxiliary display 12 a navigation number capable of specifying a stop mode that is advantageous for the player and the number of medals to be paid out in connection with the winning of a small winning combination. Since the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out do not include a common mode, it is determined whether the navigation number is displayed or not. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the number of payouts is displayed as the content.

In addition, the display mode of the navigation number to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out are when the display on the two displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is integrated. The configuration may be any configuration that does not include a common mode, and for example, the display mode of the navigation number may include a configuration including a part of the display mode of the number of payouts and vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 pays out the number of medals to a part of the display mode (navigation numbers "1" to "13" and ".") Of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification. (For example, "8" when paying out 8 medals) is included in the display mode for notifying the number of medals to be paid out (for example, "8" when paying out 8 medals). It may be configured not to include. With such a configuration, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not controlled to the same mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals, and the display mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are notified. It is possible to prevent the display mode from being mistaken for.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 lights the eighth segment of the display 12L in the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification, while in the display mode of notifying the number of medals to be paid out. By turning off the 8th segment of the display 12, the display mode of one of the two displays 12L and 12R is used to notify the display mode of the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out. Although it is a configuration that can identify whether it is a display mode, when the display modes of at least two indicators 12L and 12R are viewed as a unit, the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out can be identified. It may be a possible configuration. With such a configuration, for example, when the navigation number "8" is notified in the navigation notification, "8" is displayed on the display 12L and "-" is displayed on the display 12R to display "-8" as an integrated display. On the other hand, in the notification of the number of medals to be paid out, "" (no display) is displayed on the display 12L and "8" is displayed on the display 12R so that "8" is displayed as an integrated display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out from being mistakenly recognized.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number as an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power is cut off. Is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the main It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption when the operation of the control unit 41 or the like becomes unstable.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when a power failure is detected while the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number. The display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. However, the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be hidden when a power failure is detected, for example, in an output buffer. The game auxiliary display 12 is hidden by clearing the output port that outputs the control signal to the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the set data. By limiting the output of the drive signal output from the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. It may be a configuration or the like. Even in such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power interruption.

In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the reels are controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation as the game progresses, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid, and the game auxiliary display 12 is used for the game. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode is displayed, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted to the state before the power failure. When returning, after redisplaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, when the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure becomes constant speed rotation, the operation reception of the stop switch of the corresponding reel is accepted. By controlling to enable it, when recovering from the power failure, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 is restarted before the operation reception of the stop switch becomes effective, so the navigation number is erroneously displayed. It is possible to prevent the stop switch from being operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode suggested by the above.

When returning the control state to the state before the power failure, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment returns the state of the stop switch operation reception and the reel excitation pattern to the state before the power failure. When the control unit 41 returns, the operation reception of the stop switch is enabled and the reel rotation control is started with the excitation pattern before the power failure. The reel stopped due to the power failure is pressed before the power failure. Rotation control is started by the excitation pattern, that is, the constant speed pattern for rotating at a constant speed rotation, but in order to start the rotation of the stopped reel, the torque is insufficient and the rotation is not started. After starting the rotation control of the reel, a predetermined period (a period longer than the time required for the reel sensor to detect the reference position when the reel is rotated) elapses without the reference position being detected by the reel sensor. When this happens, it is determined that the reel rotation error is detected, the operation reception of the stop switch is invalidated, the excitation pattern is changed from the stopped state to the starting pattern for accelerating, and the reel rotation control is started again. Can be accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Then, the operation reception of the stop switch, which is invalidated due to the determination of the reel rotation error, can be re-enabled when the reel accelerates to a predetermined constant speed rotation. In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the main control unit 41 is restored, the navigation notification display data is reset in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, so that the slot machine When the power supply to 1 is restarted, after the game auxiliary display 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification, the reception of the stop operation by the stop switch can be enabled, and the player can enable the game. When the stop operation can be performed by the stop switch, the navigation number can be reliably displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification. Further, in such a configuration, when the main control unit 41 returns, the stop operation by the stop switch is once enabled and then disabled, and then the reel rotation control is performed again. When the reel rotates at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch is re-enabled, but when the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification display data is displayed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. By resetting, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 can be continuously displayed even during the period from when the main control unit 41 is restored until the stop operation by the top switch is enabled again. When the player can perform the stop operation by the stop switch, the navigation number can be surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to perform the navigation notification.

In the main control unit 41 of this embodiment, the start switch 7 is operated with the specified number of bets set, and after the game is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are all operated. The predetermined contents are in the state before the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R of the above are stopped and the game is ended, and the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode for the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When an error that causes the error code to be displayed is detected, when the game ends, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 so that the error is detected during the game. Therefore, since it is restricted from displaying the error code as a predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period until the game ends, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode. It is possible to prevent the misidentification of whether it is an error code or an error code as a predetermined content.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays an error code as a predetermined content other than the navigation number while displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode for the player on the game auxiliary display 12. If the condition to be used is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 does not display the predetermined content until the end of the game, but the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number other than the navigation number. It suffices if the display content is not displayed, and even if the display content other than the error code is applied as the predetermined content, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number or the predetermined content. It is possible to prevent the misidentification of whether or not.

Next, the control related to the setting of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 49.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and as the first display content, the medal given by winning a small winning combination. It is possible to display the number of payouts, and by setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 49A, the main control unit 41 has the payout number display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and during the period in which the payout number is displayed as the first display content. When an error is detected in, then when the error display condition is satisfied as a predetermined display switching condition for switching the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 to the special display content, the error state is controlled and the output buffer is controlled. A save process for saving the data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, by initializing the output buffer once, after controlling the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 to be hidden, the error display data is set in the output buffer as the data for displaying the special display contents. While controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to display an error code as a special display content, it controls the error state and stands by.

Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated according to a predetermined operation procedure to release the error state and the return condition is satisfied, the reset process for returning the data saved in the RAM 41c to the output buffer is performed. By returning the payout number display data for displaying the payout number as the first display content from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout number as the first display content. ..

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the error display condition is satisfied after detecting the error, so that the error is detected. During the period from when the error display condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is restricted from being changed, and when the period elapses, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. You can do it.

Further, when the main control unit 41 of this embodiment detects an error when the game is started and at least one reel is rotationally controlled, all the reels are stopped and all the reels are stopped. By stopping the reel, the error is notified when the game ends, but if an error is detected when the game is started and the rotation of the reel is controlled, an error is detected. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may detect the error when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number as the navigation notification. , The game auxiliary display 12 may display an error code indicating the content of the error.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the total number of medals to be paid out as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 (8 in this embodiment). By setting the data to display, if an error is detected during the period when the total number of medals to be paid out to the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed as the first display content, then the error display condition is changed. When the configuration is established, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched so as to display an error code indicating the content of the error detected as the special display content (see FIG. 44), but the main control unit 41 is configured. After setting the initial data of the payout number display data when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , The display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be updated. In such a configuration, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated and the data is small. While controlling the payout of a predetermined number of medals with the winning of a winning combination, for example, a payout error (E1) is detected due to a shortage of medals in the hopper unit 34, and the error display condition is satisfied. In this case, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth piece, etc.) is saved in the save area. After that, by initializing the output buffer once, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden, the error display data indicating the payout error is set in the output buffer, and the error code is displayed. Then, when the return condition is satisfied, as the payout number display data, the payout number display data for displaying the number of medals last detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, the fourth piece, etc.) is displayed on the game auxiliary display. By returning to the output buffer of 12, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the display content when an error is detected.

As shown in FIG. 49B, in the main control unit 41, the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed as the second display content during the period. When an error is detected in, after that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error state is controlled, and the same save process as when switching the above-mentioned first display content to the special display content is performed. , The navigation notification display data set in the output buffer can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and while displaying an error code as a special display content, it waits in an error state, and when the recovery condition is satisfied, it is saved in the above RAM 41c. By performing the same return processing as when returning the data of the first display content to the output buffer, the navigation notification display data of the RAM 41c is returned to the output buffer, and the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed before the error is detected. A similar navigation number can be displayed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment regardless of whether the payout number display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 or the navigation notification display data is set. By performing the common evacuation process, the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data can be evacuated to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Further, when the main control unit 41 returns the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is also saved. Is also returned to the output buffer, by performing a common return process, it is possible to return the payout number display data and the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer. ing.

As in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which both the number of medals to be paid out to the player and the advantageous operation mode for the player are displayed on one display, a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is displayed. There is a possibility that the processing and the display processing for displaying the advantageous operation mode interfere with each other, and an unintended display is performed on the game auxiliary display.

On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 included in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the display contents based on the predetermined data by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer. In this configuration, the main control unit 41 sets the payout number display data as predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and pays out the medal given by winning a small winning combination as the first display content. It is possible to display the number of sheets, and by setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs, and the game auxiliary display 12 has a configuration in which the error code is displayed. When the error display condition is satisfied as the condition for displaying the special display content while the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the display content of 1, the save process is executed and the number of payout number set in the output buffer is displayed. After saving the data to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, by setting the error display data for displaying the error code as a special display content in the output buffer, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the error state is changed. When the return condition is satisfied by being released, the return process is executed and the payout number display data saved in the RAM 41c is returned to the output buffer, so that the first display is displayed again on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to display the number of medals to be paid out as the content, and an error occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying a navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player as the second display content. When the display condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned save process is executed to save the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then display an error code as a special display content. By setting the error display data of the above in the output buffer, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and when the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the above return process is executed. By returning the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the navigation number again as the second display content. When the condition for switching to the display of the special display content is satisfied during the display of the first display content or the second display content, the data or the second table for causing the first display content set in the output buffer. The data for saving the contents, setting the special display contents in the output buffer to display the special display contents, and displaying the saved first display contents when the return condition is satisfied or the second Since the data for displaying the display contents of the above is returned to the output buffer and the first display contents or the second display contents are displayed again, different types of information can be displayed correctly.

Further, by executing the common save process, the payout number display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to evacuate, the capacity of the evacuation process for evacuating these display contents can be reduced.

Further, the main control unit 41 executes a common save process when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied even when the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. The hidden data set in the output buffer may be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. With such a configuration, regardless of the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the hidden data may be saved. Since the processing when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be standardized, the capacity of the processing performed when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be reduced.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restores the payout number display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer by executing the common return process, and is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to return the navigation notification display data to the output buffer, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the return processing for returning these display contents.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is in a state where the game auxiliary display 12 is displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous for the player, and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When a power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized to hide the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12, but the display content is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Regardless of the displayed content, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 may be initialized when a power failure is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being performed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power failure regardless of the display state on the game auxiliary display 12.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can display the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When switching the contents, the data set in the output buffer is saved in the RAM 41c and new data is set, so that the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12 can be switched to the display contents based on the new data. However, when the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided so as to be switchable and the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the first output buffer is set. While the display content based on the data set in the output buffer of is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, when the second output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the second output buffer is displayed. As a configuration in which the display contents based on the data set in the output buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is configured by switching the output buffer between the first output buffer and the second output buffer. The display contents of the above may be switched.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, in a configuration in which a first output buffer and a second output buffer are provided as output buffers of the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 displays the game auxiliary display. Occurs when an error is detected when the number of payouts is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the payout number display data in the first output buffer set as the output buffer of the device 12. While the error display data including the error code indicating the content of the error is set in the second output buffer, the payout number display data set in the first output buffer is retained as it is. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is changed to the game auxiliary display 12 by controlling the error state and switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the first output buffer to the second output buffer. While controlling to display the error code based on the error display data set in the output buffer of 2, control the error state and wait.

Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated in a predetermined operation procedure to release the error state and the return condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first. By switching to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of payouts based on the payout number display data held in the first output buffer. Further, when switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the return condition is satisfied, the second output buffer is initialized based on the fact that the error state is cleared.

Further, although not shown, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is set as the first output buffer, and the navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number. When an error is detected and an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the error display data is displayed in the second output buffer when the error is detected. After that, when the error display condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched to the second output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can display the error code, and then. By switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the first output buffer when the return condition is satisfied, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 can be returned to the navigation number.

With such a configuration, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first display content is the number of medals to be paid out by winning a small winning combination, and the second display content is an advantageous stop operation for the player. It is possible to display the navigation number suggesting the mode and the error code indicating the content as a special display content on the common game auxiliary display 12.

Further, when the main control unit 41 detects an error, the main control unit 41 sets error display data including an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the second output buffer, the error state is released, and the recovery condition is satisfied. When this is done, the second output buffer is initialized and the error display data is erased. Therefore, the second output is performed for the period from the time when the error is detected until the recovery condition is satisfied, that is, the period during which the error occurs. Since the error display data is held in the buffer, it has become possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, an error occurrence status determination, using the data set in the second output buffer. There is.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the error display data in the second output buffer when an error is detected, while holding the data set in the first output buffer as it is, so that the first Using the data set in the output buffer, it is possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, determining the control status such as whether the navigation notification is being performed or the data is being paid out.

Further, the main control unit 41 switches the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied after setting the error display data in the second output buffer, so that the output is output. After switching the buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer without delay.

Further, even in such a configuration, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the number of medals to be paid out, every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , The payout number display data may be updated to control the display of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated. Even in such a configuration, an error occurs while the payout number display data is being updated. Then, when the error display condition is satisfied, the payout number display data in the middle of updating is output as the first output during the period in which the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 based on the second output buffer. Since it is held in the buffer, when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed based on the first output buffer, so that the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is errored. Can be restored to the display content when is detected.

In this way, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In a configuration including an output buffer, the main control unit 41 displays a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player as a normal display content and an error code indicating the content of an error occurring as a special display content on the game auxiliary display. It is a configuration that can be displayed on 12, and by setting the first output buffer as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and setting the navigation notification display data in the first output buffer, the normal display contents are displayed. It is possible to display the navigation number as, and when the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition to display the special display content while the normal display content is being displayed, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. By switching from the first output buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed with the special display content based on the data set in the second output buffer, and the error state is cleared. By switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the second output buffer to the first output buffer when the return condition is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 is again navigated as the first display content. Even with the configuration in which the numbers are displayed, different types of information can be correctly displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as in the configuration of the present embodiment.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration including, the main control unit 41 displays the error code as a special display content before the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition, and after the error is detected, the content of the error that has occurred. By configuring the error display data including the error code indicating the above to be set, the error display data for displaying the error code as a special display content is output to the second output without being aware of the timing when the error display condition is satisfied. The timing to set in the buffer can be designed relatively freely.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration including, in a predetermined determination process (for example, error determination), the data set in the first output buffer or the second output buffer can be referred to, so that the first output buffer can be referred to. Since the predetermined determination process can be performed using the data set in the output buffer or the second output buffer (for example, in the case of error determination, the data set in the second output buffer), a predetermined determination is made. It is not necessary to have the data used for processing separately from the data of the display contents.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. In the configuration provided with, as the normal display contents, the number of medals to be paid out to the player (first display contents) upon winning a prize, and the display period do not overlap with the first display contents, which is an advantageous operation for the player. The main control unit 41 sets the first display content and the second display content in the first output buffer, including the navigation number (second display content) indicating the mode, so that the game auxiliary display 12 can be used. By displaying the number of medals paid out and the navigation number, different display contents that do not overlap in the display period can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting them in the first output buffer. There is no need to provide an extra output buffer.

Further, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12, as the first output buffer and the second output buffer. When a power failure is detected, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are set regardless of which display is being displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. By configuring the configuration to initialize the existing data, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 at the time of power failure.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the game control board 40 can be connected to the test device 1300 via the first interface board (IF1) 1100 and the second interface board (IF2) 1200, and is slotted. A test signal generated in relation to the result of the game in the machine 1 is output from the game control board 40 to the test device 1300, and a test signal is input from the test device 1300 to the game control board 40. By connecting the game control board 40 and the test device 1300, it is possible to automatically perform a simulation test.

The game control board 40 is connected to the IF1 board 1100 and connected to the first information output circuit 40a for outputting the first test signal, the input circuit 40d for inputting the test signal, and the IF2 board 1200 for the second test. A second information output circuit 40b that outputs a signal is mounted.

The first test signal shows the control state and the result of the game, and the input request lamp signal, the startable lamp signal, the BB signal, the RB game signal, the replay game signal, and the 1st to 3rd reels can be stopped. Ramp signal, 1st to 3rd reel index signals, payout request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, 7-segment display a to g signal for setting value display, internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, signal delay signal, 1st Includes a reel motor excitation signal, a second reel motor excitation signal, and a third reel motor excitation signal. These first test signals are output under the control of the main control unit 41.

The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not a medal insertion is requested.

The start enable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start enable LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start enable LED 18 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not the game start operation is required. ..

The BB in-game signal, the RB game in-game signal, and the replay game in-game signal are signals indicating that the game state is in the BB, RB, or replay game, respectively, and the game state at that time can be specified.

The 1st to 3rd reel stop possible lamp signals are drive signals of the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, that is, signals indicating whether or not the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are lit. Therefore, it is possible to specify whether or not the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel can be stopped.

The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R, and can identify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

The payout request signal is a drive signal of the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is driven, and it is possible to specify that the medal payout operation is being performed.

The payout count signal is a signal output every time the payout of medals accompanying a winning is detected, and is a signal for counting the payout of medals on the test apparatus 1300 side.

The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled.

The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are driving signals of LEDs constituting each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. ..

The internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals are signals indicating the winning status of the winning combination. Further, the signal delaying signal is a signal indicating that the signal is delayed due to the execution of the effect during the game.

The first to third reel motor excitation signals are the drive signals of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the driving status of each reel can be specified. ..

The test signal includes an on switch signal, a reel start switch signal, a 1st to 3rd reel stop switch signal, a payout switch signal, a stop release switch signal, a setting key switch signal, and a setting switch signal, and is controlled by the test apparatus 1300. It is input to the board 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of various switches and sensors included in the slot machine 1, are detected by the switch detection circuit 44 included in the game control board 40, and are each test signal by the main control unit 41. The detection of the switch or sensor corresponding to the above is determined.

The throw-in switch signal is a signal corresponding to the throw-in medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

The first information output circuit 40a is a circuit for outputting the first test signal to the IF1 substrate 1100, and the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is via the IF1 substrate 1100. Is output to the test device 1300.

The input circuit 40d is a circuit for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and the test signal input to the input circuit 40d is detected by the switch detection circuit 44. ..

The IF1 board 1100 includes an input terminal for inputting a first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a, and an output terminal for outputting the input first test signal to the test apparatus 1300. ing. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and the information contained in the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is electrically isolated from the test apparatus 1300. It is designed to be transmitted to the side. Further, the IF1 substrate 1100 includes an input terminal for inputting a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 and an output terminal for outputting the input test signal to the input circuit 40d. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler so that the information contained in the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is transmitted to the input circuit 40d in an electrically isolated state. It has become. The configuration is such that the first test signal and the test signal are transmitted while the input terminal and the output terminal are electrically insulated. For example, the input terminal and the output are transmitted via a photo interrupter or an isolator. It may be configured to connect to a terminal.

The second test signal indicates an operation mode notified by the navigation notification, and includes a game start signal and a navigation notification signal. The second test signal is output under the control of the main control unit 41.

The game start signal is a signal indicating the start of the game. Further, as for the navigation signal, the navigation notification display data for displaying the navigation number on the game assistance display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed by using the game assistance display 12 described above is the output buffer of the game assistance display 12. It is a drive signal for lighting the 8th segment of the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the setting to, and the navigation notification is executed, and the type of the winning notification target combination and the game When the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the person is displayed on the indicators 12L and 12R, it is turned on, the navigation notification is not executed, and the navigation number is not displayed on the indicators 12L and 12R. It is a signal indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by sometimes turning off.

The display signal is based on the fact that the navigation notification display data, the payout number display data, and the error display data are set in the output buffer of the game assistance display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed by using the game assistance display 12 described above. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 in a lighting mode for displaying any of the navigation number, the number of payouts, and the error code, and is related to the navigation notification. It includes a plurality of information such as information, information on the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and information on an error code indicating the content when an error occurs.

The navigation notification signal is a signal generated by extracting only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal by the conversion circuit 40c mounted on the second information output circuit, and the navigation number is displayed during the navigation notification. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode to be displayed, and is a signal capable of specifying the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

The second information output circuit 40b is a circuit for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 board 1200, and the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is via the IF2 board 1200. Is output to the test device 1300.

Further, in the second information output circuit 40b, the navigation signal and the display signal input to the game auxiliary display 12 provided on the game control board 40 are branched and input on the game control board 40. In addition, a conversion circuit 40c is provided that converts the display signal into a navigation notification signal by enabling or disabling the display signal based on the navigation signal, and outputs the display signal to assist the game when the navigation signal is output. The display signal of the display 12 can be output to the IF2 board 1200 as a navigation notification signal.

The IF2 board 1200 is a test device based on an input terminal to which a second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is input and a second test signal (game start signal, navigation notification signal) input. It includes an IF2 control unit 1203 that converts a second test signal that can be recognized by the 1300 side, and an output terminal that outputs a second test signal generated by the IF2 control unit 1203 to the test device 1300. ..

The IF2 control unit 1203 is composed of a CPU, RAM, ROM, a reset circuit for resetting the CPU, and the like, and the navigation notification signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is designated as a stop execution position signal and a stop reel. It is converted into a signal and stop strobe signal and output. The stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, and stop strobe signal output from the IF2 control unit 1203 are output from the output terminal via the photocoupler, and are output from the IF2 control unit 1203 side and the test device 1300 side. The signal is transmitted in a state of being electrically isolated from and. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be electrically isolated, and the stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal may be transmitted. For example, a photo interrupter or an isolator may be used. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be connected to each other via the device.

The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position for the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later according to the current gaming state and the effect mode, and is a corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. It is possible to specify the number of steps (0 to 336) of the reel motor.

The stop reel designation signal is a signal that specifies whether the reel that recommends the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and stops. It is possible to specify the reel to which the stop operation at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal is applied.

The stop strobe signal is a signal requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

Further, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 are connected via a power supply line, and power used by a device such as a photocoupler mounted on the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the game control board 40 via the power supply line. On the other hand, the game control board 40 and the IF2 board 1200 are not connected by a power supply line, but the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 are connected via a power supply line and supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100. A part of the generated power is supplied via the IF1 board 1100 as power used by devices such as the IF2 control unit 1203 and the photocoupler mounted on the IF2 board 1200. Therefore, as the power supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 via the power supply line, the power used by the device mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the power used by the device mounted on the IF2 board 1200 are used. Power is supplied to ensure both.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is provided with a connection terminal to which wiring from the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be connected, a first information output circuit 40a, a second information output circuit 40b, and an input circuit 40d. A wiring pattern for transmitting the first test signal output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits to the socket of the first information output circuit 40a, and a second test signal are provided together with a possible socket. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the socket of the second information output circuit 40b and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 via the input circuit 40d are formed, and the main control unit 41 is formed. The first test signal and the second test signal output from the various drive circuits are output via these wiring patterns, the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the connection terminal, and the connection terminal. , The test signal input via the input circuit 40d and the wiring pattern is input to the switch detection circuit 44.

Further, since the connection terminal is composed of, for example, a signal pin to which a probe from the IF1 board 1100 can be connected and a connector to which a cable from the IF1 board 1100 can be connected, the connection terminal is connected to the IF1 board 1100 via these connection terminals. It is possible to easily connect the wiring of.

Further, the connection terminals are provided for convenience in connecting the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the connection terminals for inputting and outputting these test signals and test signals are shipped to the amusement store. It is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine to be used. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is formed with a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminal, and cutting can be performed along these cutting holes. At the time of shipment to, it is possible to disconnect the portion provided with the connection terminal so that unnecessary signals cannot be input / output. As a result, for example, the hall equipment detects the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, identifies the winning status of the internal winning flags from the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It is possible to prevent it from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

Further, the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are provided for convenience in order to output the first test signal and the second test signal to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200. The input circuit 40d is provided for convenience in order to input a test signal from the IF1 board 1100, and is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine shipped to the game shop. is there. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is provided with a socket on which the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d can be mounted, and the first information output circuit 40a and the first information output circuit 40a are provided. 2 The information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d can be easily removed. At the time of shipment to the amusement store, the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are removed and unnecessary. It is possible to make it impossible to input and output various signals. As a result, for example, the hall equipment detects the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, identifies the winning status of the internal winning flags from the internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It is possible to prevent it from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary signal from being easily input to the game control board 40.

In addition, the number of slot machines provided by a third-party organization for conducting tests is usually about several, and other slot machines for mass production shipped to amusement stores receive these test signals and test signals. Since there is little need to output, these mass-produced slot machines may be equipped with a game control board 40 that has a wiring pattern but does not have the above-mentioned connection terminals, thereby mass-producing. It is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for the machine. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200, and the test device 1300 can be mounted only by mounting the connection terminals. It becomes possible to connect easily. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal and a connection terminal for connecting to the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200 and the test device 1300, and the slot machine for mass production is provided with a connection terminal. , These wiring patterns and connection terminals may not be provided. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not actually be output. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

Further, the slot machine for mass production is equipped with the game control board 40 which is not provided with the sockets of the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d, although the wiring pattern is formed. However, this can reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, a socket is mounted to mount the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b. The IF1 board, IF2 board, and test device 1300 can be easily connected only by attaching the input circuit 40d. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal, and a socket for attaching the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d for mass production. The slot machine may not be provided with these wiring patterns or sockets. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not actually be output. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production can be further reduced.

In this embodiment, the simulation test is automatically performed by exchanging the test signal and the test signal between the slot machine 1 and the test device 1300, and the test device 1300 automatically performs the simulation test. As a result of these tests, it is possible to output the payout rate of the slot machine 1. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times the payout count signal was detected during the test period (the number of medals paid out) to the number of times the input switch signal was output during the test period (the number of medals consumed) was calculated. The result (number of consumption / number of payouts) will be output as the payout rate.

The IF2 control unit 1203 indicates a reel that first recommends a stop reel designation signal as the first stop reel, depending on the presence or absence of navigation notification, within a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the game start signal is output by the main control unit 41. It is updated to the output state, the stop execution position signal is updated to the output state indicating the stop operation position recommended for the reel, and a certain time (50 ms) after the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal is completed. A stop strobe signal is output over a period of time, the recommended first stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and after the stop strobe signal is stopped, a certain time (50 ms) is waited. Next, in the same procedure, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, which are sequentially recommended, are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a certain time (50 ms) has elapsed.

In this way, the IF2 control unit 1203 sequentially transfers the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position to the test apparatus 1300 according to the recommended operation mode. By notifying the response, the operating procedure recommended by the test apparatus 1300 can be specified.

In this embodiment, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the third stop reel and its stop operation position are continuously set with respect to the test apparatus 1300 for a maximum of 2 seconds. However, it is also possible to transmit these sequentially at the start of the game and at the time when the reels are stopped, without transmitting these continuously.

The ROM of the IF2 control unit 1203 stores a recommended operation mode table in which recommended operation modes are registered in advance according to the presence or absence of navigation notification, and the IF2 control unit 1203 recommends according to the presence or absence of navigation notification. The operation mode is acquired from the recommended operation procedure table, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are output based on the acquired operation mode. It should be noted that the IF2 control unit 1203 may acquire the recommended operation mode by using a program for determining the recommended operation mode according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification without having the recommended operation mode table registered in advance.

In this embodiment, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB and RB are not output, the stop on the left, middle and right. The stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the stop reel is specified, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the constituent symbols of the cherry and the watermelon that may be missed can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. It should be noted that such an operation mode corresponds to an operation mode in which the medal payout rate is highest in a situation where navigation notification is not performed.

In addition, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed and the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB and RB are output, the stop order is left, middle, and right. The stop reel designation signal is output in order, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol constituting the special combination according to the navigation number can be drawn is output for the corresponding stop reel. For example, when BB1 is elected as a special role and 11 is output as the navigation number, stop execution indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol of "red 7" can be drawn in for each rotating reel. If the position signal is output and other BB2, RB, SB are won as special roles and 10, 12 and 13 are output as the navigation numbers, "blue" is output according to the output navigation number. A stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which the symbols of "7", "white 7", and "BAR" can be drawn is output.

Further, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order of the stop order specified from the navigation notification signal, and the corresponding stop reel is arbitrarily selected. Outputs a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position.

As described above, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode is acquired according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired operation mode are output to the test apparatus 1300. The reel stop switch signal can be output on the device 1300 side in the recommended operation mode depending on the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by the test by the test device 1300.

Further, in this embodiment, after the special role (BB, RB) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the special role is won after the implementation condition of the special role navigation notification determined by the main control unit 41 is satisfied. A navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting a symbol constituting the special combination is set, and a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an operation mode for stopping the symbol corresponding to the navigation number are set in the test device 1300. After winning a special role in an internal lottery in a slot machine on the market, after being notified of the winning of a special role by a definite notification by the sub control unit 91, it is operated in a stop operation mode in which the special role is won. Is performed and the special role is won, the navigation number is output and the special role is won in the game after the implementation condition of the special role navigation notification is satisfied and the final notification is performed. The reel stop switch signal can be output depending on the operation mode, and the payout rate close to the payout rate in the market can be obtained by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

Further, in this embodiment, since a signal capable of specifying the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300, it is arranged on the reel. Even if the number of symbols or the number of steps assigned to one symbol differs depending on the model of the slot machine, the output control of the stop switch signal with respect to the stop execution position signal can be shared on the test apparatus 1300 side.

In the test system including the slot machine 1 of this embodiment and the test device 1300 capable of testing the game by the slot machine, the first test signal among the test signals output from the game control board 40 is , The second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 substrate 1100, and the second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1200.

In such a configuration, when power lines are connected from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 in order to supply power to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, the game control boards 40 and 1 The number of wirings between the interface board (IF1) and the IF2 board 1200 is increased.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 can be connected to each other via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1100. Therefore, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and the power supplied to the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the IF1 board 1100 to the IF2 board 1200. , The wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output the first test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and the game control board 40 can output the first test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. On the other hand, the configuration is such that a second test signal can be output, and the game control board 40 can be connected to the IF1 board 1100 via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1100. While it can be supplied, it is not connected to the IF2 board 1200 via the power supply line, power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and the power is not directly supplied to the IF2 board 1200 via the IF1 board 1100. Since power can be supplied to the game control board 40, the number of wirings between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a navigation notification signal including information related to the navigation notification to the IF2 board 1200 as a second test signal, and the IF2 board 1200 can output the navigation notification signal. The IF2 control unit 1203 is provided with an IF2 control unit 1203 that generates signals (stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, stop strobe signal) in a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300, and the IF2 control unit 1203 is a game control board. Since it is operated by the power supply supplied from the 40 to the IF1 board 1100, it is not necessary to output the power supply from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and only the second test signal is output. The IF2 control unit 1203 generates a signal in a mode that can be input by the test device 1300 and outputs the signal to the test device 1300, so that the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. it can.

It should be noted that the game control board 40 may generate a second test signal in a mode that can be input by the test device 1300, and output the second test signal to the test device 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. good.

Further, the IF1 board 1100 only relays the first test signal output from the game control board 40, but the IF1 board 1100 also has a control unit on which a CPU or the like is mounted and is mounted on the game control board 40. The output first test signal may be changed to a mode that can be input by the test apparatus 1300. With such a configuration, the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, a photocoupler is mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the input terminal and the output terminal on each board are connected via the photocoupler and output from the game control board 40. The first test signal and the second test signal are output to the test apparatus via the photocoupler mounted on the IF1 substrate 1100 and the IF2 substrate 1200, so that the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 are electrically connected. Since the devices are not connected to each other, it is possible to prevent the other device from being damaged due to an abnormality in one device.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with indicators 12L and 12R that display the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R notified by the navigation notification, and the indicators 12L and 12R are notified by the navigation notification. The display signal, which is a drive signal for lighting, is branched and output to the IF2 board as a navigation notification signal via the second information output circuit 40b, so that the indicators 12L and 12R The drive signal of can be used as a navigation notification signal.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute navigation notification when the AT is controlled, and the game control board 40 sends a first test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100. The configuration includes a first information output circuit 40a for output and a second information output circuit 40b for outputting a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 board 1200 to the IF2 board 1200. The control unit 41 may not execute the navigation notification, and the game control board 40 may not output the navigation notification signal to the IF2 board 1200. In such a configuration, the first information output circuit 40a of the present embodiment may be used. Whether or not a means for executing navigation notification and a means for outputting a navigation notification signal are provided by outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100 using the same circuit as Regardless of this, the game control board 40 can have a common circuit for outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100.

Further, in this embodiment, the display signal and the navigation signal are input to the second information output circuit 40b, and only the information related to the navigation notification is extracted from the display signal by the conversion circuit in the second information output circuit 40b to perform the navigation notification. The signal is generated and the navigation notification signal is transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200, but the main control unit 41 directly generates a signal containing only the information related to the navigation notification. By inputting the signal to the second information output circuit 40b, the signal may be transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200.

Further, it may be configured to output as a navigation notification signal by using all or a part of the data of the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command, and the push order command transmitted to the sub control unit 91. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to generate a signal only for outputting the navigation notification signal. As such a configuration, for example, the main control unit 41 can transmit a push order command to the IF2 control unit 1203, and the IF2 control unit 1203 specifies a navigation number based on the push order command, and the said The stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn for the corresponding stop reel is output. It may be configured to be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode in which the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on by the navigation notification is such that the indicators 12L and 12R are turned on by one lighting mode when the notification target combination is won, so that from the first stop All the stop orders up to the third stop can be specified, and the drive signal for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R is branched in the lighting mode and transmitted to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. As for the lighting mode for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R by the navigation notification, after indicating the reels 2L, 2C and 2R to be stopped next, the stopping order is sequentially changed by switching the lighting mode each time the stop operation is performed. It may be configured to notify so that it can be specified. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sends a signal capable of specifying all the stop orders from the first stop to the third stop when the notification target combination is won. It is preferably configured to generate and transmit to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 substrate 1200, thereby specifying the stop order notified by the navigation notification at an earlier stage on the test apparatus 1300 side. Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the navigation notification is configured to notify the stop operation mode (stop order and stop operation timing) that is advantageous to the player, but the advantage for the player does not change as an effect. May be configured to perform navigation notification for performing the reel stop operation in a predetermined stop operation mode. In such a configuration, for example, as one re-game combination in which a prize is won and a re-game is given regardless of the stop order, the operation is performed in one stop order (for example, right, middle, left stop order). The combination of 1 symbols (for example, "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7") is stopped, and the stop operation is performed in another stop order (for example, left middle right stop order), so that the first symbol is used. In a configuration in which a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols (for example, "replay-replay-replay") is stopped, when the main control unit 41 decides to stop the combination of the first symbols as an effect. , When it is decided not to stop the combination of the first symbol by outputting the navigation number indicating the stop order of one, the navigation number indicating the other stop order is output, so that the first effect is produced. When stopping the combination of the symbols of 1, the IF2 control unit 1203 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and outputs the stop reel designation signal in the order of stopping the reels according to the navigation number. In addition, by outputting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be pulled in for the corresponding stop reel, the stop operation close to the slot machine on the market can be performed even by the test by the test device 1300. Can be done.

Further, with such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the advantage of the next game or later is changed on condition that the combination of the first symbols is stopped (the combination of the first symbols is stopped). A configuration in which the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state, a configuration in which the number of games controlled by the AT is added by stopping the combination of the first symbols, etc.), and a combination of the first symbols according to the navigation number. Even in the configuration in which the player is suggested to stop the operation mode, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the corresponding stop reel is configured according to the navigation number. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol can be drawn in, it is possible to obtain a payout rate close to the payout rate in the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

Further, with such a configuration, for example, a combination having the same degree of advantage (for example, a replay), a combination composed of a combination of the first symbols and a combination composed of a combination of the second symbols can be used. , Indicates a stop operation mode in which the winning combination of the first symbol combination can be won in order to simply stop the combination of the first symbol on the reel when winning in the internal lottery. When outputting the navigation number, the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the stop operation position at which the configuration symbol corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in for the corresponding stop reel. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating, the reel can be stopped with a content close to the content of the stop mode of the reel stopped in the slot machine on the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game machine information display 50 is mounted on the game control board 40, and the information necessary for determining the gambling of the game machine is displayed. As shown in FIG. 52, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being housed in a board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the game machine information display 50 has a game control board 40. The display contents can be visually recognized via the substrate case 120a in a state of being housed in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a.

Therefore, the display content of the game machine information display 50 can be visually recognized via the board case 120a in a state where the front door 1b is open. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display content of the game machine information display 50 is not hindered. Specifically, at the position on the display side of the game machine information display 50, all parts such as reels and other boards provided in the slot machine 1 are not provided, and the display side of the game machine information display 50 is not provided. The wiring that connects the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. Further, in the board case 120a for accommodating the game control board 40 on which the game machine information display 50 is mounted, a seal sticker, an entry section for writing an opener, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. A label on which information such as the above is displayed, a sticking part on which the label is affixed, a display part on which the information is printed and engraved, a heat dissipation hole, parts such as a fan for heat dissipation, etc. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

Further, the substrate case 120a is designed to be sealed after accommodating the game control substrate 40, and in the sealed state, the sealing cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. It has become. As a sealing method, there are a method of sealing the sealing piece with a one-way screw, a method of welding a part of the case, and a method of attaching a sealing sticker that remains after peeling. As a result, the connection line connecting the game machine information display 50 and the game control board 40 is disconnected, and the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is correctly displayed. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed, or to prevent fraud such as sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the game machine information display 50 to hinder visibility.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a character payout ratio between the past 6000 games. , The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the game machine information display 50. Take control.

The advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous section related to AT in the past 6000 games. The advantageous section related to AT is a period from when an AT is won in a state where the AT is not won until all control of the AT associated with the winning AT is completed and the shift to the non-AT is completed. The ratio of advantageous sections to the total total number of games is a game controlled to an advantageous section related to AT with respect to the total number of games, which is the total number of games since the data of RAM 41c was initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason. It is a ratio of numbers. The joint payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out during the BB controlled between the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the total number of consecutive payouts. The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out during the BB and RB controlled during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games, which is paid out during the advantageous section related to AT controlled during the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, which is the cumulative number of medals. The ratio of consecutive payouts to the total cumulative payouts is the total number of medals paid out at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized. It is a ratio of the number of consecutive medals paid out, which is the cumulative number of medals paid out in the controlled BB from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present. The ratio of accessory payouts to the total cumulative payouts is the payouts in the BB and RB that have been controlled from the time the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present, at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason. It is the ratio of the number of bonuses paid out, which is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled from the time when the data of the RAM 41c was initialized to the present, or at the time of shipment from the factory to the total cumulative payout number. It is the ratio of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, which is the cumulative number of medals.

In this embodiment, as a bonus, only the RB and the BB in which the RB operates continuously are mounted, but all kinds of small winning medals are allowed, but some reels are pulled in. The number of medals paid out during the CT may be reflected in the bonus payout ratio when the CT and the CB in which the CT operates continuously may be mounted. , When the CB is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CB will be reflected in the consecutive payout ratio.

The main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio among the total cumulative number of games, a continuous payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games in the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. Figure 53 shows the ratio of payouts for the characters in between, the ratio of payouts in the advantageous section between the past 6000 games, the ratio of the payouts for consecutive roles to the total number of total payouts, the ratio of payouts for the goods to the total number of payouts, and the ratio of payouts in the advantageous section to the total number of total payouts. The display order is switched every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) and displayed on the game machine information display 50.

At this time, when the game machine information display 50 displays an abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed in the upper two digits (for example, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed, " "A1") is displayed, and the data to be displayed at present is displayed in the last two digits. In this embodiment, any ratio or ratio is displayed in%.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment shows the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in FIG. 53. In the case where the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays are completely cycled when the display is switched at predetermined period intervals in the display order shown. Even if there is, the update to the new value is restricted, and the display is cycled using the original value. Specifically, if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed, the new values are calculated and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the game machine information display 50, the display on the game machine information display 50 can be displayed. The original value may be used to make a round, and when the round display is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer, and then the new value may be displayed. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until the end of the round, the display on the game machine information display 50 is restricted from performing the calculation for obtaining the new values. Is completed, and when the display of the round is completed, an operation for obtaining a new value may be performed, and then the display on the game machine information display 50 may be performed using the new value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display contents such as the advantageous section ratio calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the game machine information display 50 make a round.

Further, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games exceeds the specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, normal). If it is always lit, blinking lit, etc.) to display the advantageous section ratio. Further, when the continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the continuous combination payment ratio to the total cumulative number of games exceeds the specified ratio (for example, 60%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, 60%). If it is normally lit all the time, it will blink and lit, etc.) to display the continuous payout ratio. Further, when the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative number of games pay out exceeds the specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, 70%). If the normal lighting is always on, the accessory payout ratio is displayed by blinking lighting, etc.). Further, when the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceed the specified ratio (for example, 80%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from the usual one (for example, 80%). If it is normally lit all the time, it will blink and lit, etc.) to display the advantageous section payout ratio.

In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, continuous combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, they are displayed in a display mode different from the usual one, and the gambling is high. It is possible to warn that it may be controlled.

Further, the main control unit 41 controls the display mode different from the usual one, such as blinking the display of the upper two digits of the game machine information display 50 when the game has not reached 6000 games. It is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize that the displayed ratios and ratios may be biased.

In addition, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, a character payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games. Judge whether the data used to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts is normal. , When it is determined to be abnormal (when the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, the number of advantageous section payouts is larger than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (01 repetition, etc.), etc.) Initializes the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, causes the game machine information display 50 to display that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF"), and notifies that fact. It is possible to recognize that the calculation of these data is not performed normally.

When initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, among the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games. If at least one of the above is determined to be abnormal, the data relating to all of them may be initialized, or only a part of the data may be initialized. If at least one of the advantageous section ratio, consecutive payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative number of games is determined to be abnormal, the data related to all of these should be initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when an abnormality is determined in a part of the data for the past 6000 games, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is initialized, or conversely, a part of the data for the total cumulative number of games is initialized. When an abnormality is determined, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total total number of games may be initialized.

In addition, it is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous section ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is normal, and it is determined to be abnormal. In that case, a predetermined operation (for example, the switches such as the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, and the setting key switch 37 are operated by the predetermined procedure) is performed. By doing so, the data may be initialized.

Further, in the notification that an abnormality has been determined, as described above, even if the gaming machine information display 50 is made to display that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF") and notify that fact. Good, when an abnormality is determined, a command that can identify that fact is transmitted to the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 notifies that the abnormality has been determined by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You may do so.

In addition, the main control unit 41 has a period from the start of data collection to the arrival of 6000 games, that is, the ratio of advantageous sections between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections to the total cumulative number of games, and the continuous operation between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, bonus payout ratio between past 6000 games, advantageous section payout ratio between past 6000 games, consecutive payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, bonus payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, advantage over total cumulative payouts During the period when the data for calculating the section payout ratio and the like is insufficient, the display content of the game machine information display 50 is different from the display mode after 6000 games after the start of data collection (for example, constant). It is displayed (blinks at intervals, etc.), and it is possible to recognize that the data for calculating the displayed content is an insufficient period.

In this embodiment, the ratio of advantageous sections between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections to the total cumulative number of games, the ratio of consecutive payments between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 during the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. The character payout ratio between games, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the character payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are specified. Although it is switched and displayed every period, it is displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or the operation of a predetermined operation switch (for example, reset / setting switch 38) is performed. It is displayed only when it is detected, it is displayed when it is not in the game, it is displayed during the setting change status or setting confirmation, and it is displayed only for a specified period after the power is turned on. You may do so. Further, the display content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed instead of automatically switching at each predetermined period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game machine information indicates that the data abnormality used for calculating the display content of the game machine information display 50 has been determined and that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient. Although the configuration is such that the display is notified using the display 50, a command that can identify that fact is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 so that it can be confirmed by the display or the effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games, the continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the character payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games. The advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the game machine information display 50. , In addition to these displays, when the RAM 41c is initialized by changing the setting, or when the disconnection of the wiring (backup power supply wiring, etc.) provided in the slot machine 1 is detected, that fact can be recognized. The contents may be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

In particular, if the setting is changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carry-over of the bonus and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or if the bonus being carried over is cleared, the game is defined while the bonus is being carried over. More than a few were performed, or an operation to intentionally end the advantageous section was performed (for example, in RT2 and RT3 during AT, the RT1 transition replay or SB was intentionally won, or a specific symbol was stopped. When an operation to shift to RT1 is performed, that is, when a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player is intentionally shifted to a game state that is unfavorable to the player, etc.) is detected, and the game machine information display 50 is disconnected. When it is detected that the connection may not be performed normally due to the occurrence of such a problem, a notice to that effect is identifiable. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. ..

In addition, as will be described later, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data, when the total cumulative data etc. is initialized, it is possible to specify that fact, as described above, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and by doing so, overflow is avoided. It is possible to recognize that the total cumulative data has been initialized by the processing to be performed separately from the initialization by an illegal operation for preventing the correct information from being displayed as the advantageous section ratio or the like.

In addition, as described above, if there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc., that fact is detected. Then, the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side, and at the time of the detection, a predetermined operation (for example, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc.) is performed without notifying the detection. By operating the switches in a predetermined procedure, connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40, etc.), these histories are provided on the main control unit 41 side. It can be confirmed by a display (for example, a game machine information display 50 or the like), a display provided on the sub-control unit 91 side (for example, a liquid crystal display 51 or the like), or an external display of the slot machine 1. You may.

In addition, the settings have been changed, the disconnection has been detected, and the connection failure of the game machine information display 50 has occurred, which is correct as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. There is a possibility that the information may not be displayed, and as mentioned above, there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. This may be confirmed by a display or an effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. In addition, the setting was changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carry-over of the bonus, and the bonus or advantageous section was forcibly terminated, or the bonus during the carry-over was cleared, the advantageous section ratio, the bonus payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records the history of detection that there is a possibility of illegal operation so that correct information is not displayed as the continuous combination payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and these are performed by a predetermined operation. You may be able to check the history of.

Next, the main control unit 41 will explain a method of aggregating and calculating data for displaying such information.

The main control unit 41 aggregates and calculates information about the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio, and displays information based on the calculation result on the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40. It is possible to execute the game machine information display process as the process. The program for performing the game machine information display processing is included in the above-mentioned non-game program, and various data used by the main control unit 41 when executing the game machine information display processing are stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b. It is remembered. Further, the main control unit 41 uses the non-game data area of the RAM 41c as a work when executing the game machine information display process. The non-game data area used by the main control unit 41 when executing the game machine information display process is backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the backup power supply is used. As long as power is supplied, the stored contents of the non-game data area are stored. Further, the main control unit 41 initializes the data stored in the game data area of the RAM 41c by performing the operation of changing the set value as described above, but the game machine information display processing. The non-game data area used when executing is not targeted for initialization even when an operation for changing a set value is performed or when initialization conditions are satisfied for another game data area. In particular, the data for aggregating, calculating, and displaying the information about the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio is not initialized.

As shown in FIG. 54, a game count counter capable of counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is added to a predetermined area of the non-game data area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and is specified for each game. The first game number counter that is initialized every time the period (6000 games in this embodiment) elapses, 1 is added for each game, and a predetermined number (6000 games in this embodiment) is set. In the embodiment, the second game number counter, which is initialized every time the predetermined period (400 games in the present embodiment) divided by 15) elapses, is initialized by adding 1 for each game. A third game count counter is provided. In addition, the first to fifth data counting buffers capable of counting one set of data and the first to fifth ring buffers provided with 15 sets of buffers capable of storing 2 bytes of data in one set are set. Has been done.

The main control unit 41 uses the first to fifth data counting buffers and the first to fifth ring buffers, and is the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). The number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, which is the number of medals given during the period controlled by BB or RB in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment), in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) The number of consecutive payouts, which is the number of medals given during the period controlled by BB, and the advantageous section controlled by AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning AT, control by AT) The number of medals granted in the period from when the game is played until the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed), the number of advantageous section payouts, and the AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). Counting the number of games in the game section, which is the number of games in the controlled advantageous section (the period from when the AT is won to when the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed). Is possible.

Specifically, when the medals are paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination, the main control unit 41 adds the number of the paid out medals to the first data counting buffer, and BB or RB. In the period controlled by BB, when medals are paid out due to the winning of a small winning combination, the number of the paid out medals is added to the second data counting buffer, and in the period controlled by BB. When a medal is paid out due to a small winning combination, the number of the paid out medals is added to the third data counting buffer, and the advantageous section controlled by AT (after winning AT, it is controlled by AT). In the period from when the game is played until the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is finished), when the medals are paid out in connection with the winning of the small winning combination, the number of the paid out medals is the fourth. The game is played in the advantageous section controlled by the AT after adding to the data counting buffer (the period from when the AT is controlled until the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed). When it is broken, one game is added to the fifth data counting buffer. In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the first to fourth data counting buffers at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined. The timing at which the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer of the above may be the timing at which medals are actually given due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (credit addition or detection of actual medal payout).

Then, every time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed based on the second game number counter, a predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers (previously updated set + 1st set buffer). , If the first or last updated set is the 15th set, the 1st set buffer) is initialized, and the 1st to 5th data count counter values are set to the predetermined set of the 1st to 5th ring buffers. In addition to adding to the buffer, the first to fifth data counting buffer values are added to the 3-byte aggregated data areas A'to D'and F'provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c, respectively. In addition, the 3-byte aggregated data areas a'to d'and f'provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and all the first to fifteenth sets of the first to fifth ring buffers are initialized. The data in the set buffer is sequentially added to the corresponding aggregated data areas a'to d', f'. After that, the first to fifth data buffers are initialized. In addition, the aggregated data area E'is updated to the value of the third game number counter.

By performing these processes, the data of the buffers of a predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers and the aggregated data areas a'to d', f', and A'to F'are the latest in each predetermined period. It will be updated to the information of.

In addition, the main control unit 41 updates the aggregated data areas a'to d'and A'to D'to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then the aggregated data area Of these, it is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregated data area a'A'has reached 3 bytes, and for the data that has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the aggregated data areas a'and A'is used. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas a and A provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. On the other hand, an extraction process for extracting a predetermined 16-bit amount of data having reached 3 bytes is performed, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary calculation data areas a and A. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the extraction process, the highest rank is specified by referring to the data in the aggregated data area, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is specified in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set in the area. Then, 16-bit data below the highest digit is extracted.

Further, for b'to d'of the aggregated data area, the value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area b'to d'by 100 is used as a 3-byte primary calculation provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set in the data areas b "to d" respectively. After that, it is referred to whether or not the aggregated data area a has been subjected to the extraction process, and if the aggregated data area a has not been extracted, the data of the aggregated data areas b "to d" is not stored in the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas b to d provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the aggregated data area a is subjected to the extraction process, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area a is specified, and the data for 16 bits below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas b to d.

Further, for B'to D'of the aggregated data area, the value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area B'to D'by 100 is used as a 3-byte primary calculation provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set in the data areas B "to D" respectively. After that, it is referred to whether or not the aggregated data area A has been extracted, and if the aggregated data area A has not been extracted, the data of the aggregated data areas B "to D" is not stored in the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data areas B to D provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the aggregation process is performed on the aggregated data area A, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area A is specified, and the data for 16 bits below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data areas B to D.

Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area b by the data in the secondary calculation data area a to determine the ratio of the total number of payouts in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). By calculating and dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of characters to be played in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated. By dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of consecutive combinations in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated, and the secondary calculation data area By dividing the data of d by the data of the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of sheets to be paid out in the advantageous section in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated.

Further, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area B by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the cumulative total number of sheets to be paid out in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary calculation data area B is obtained. , By dividing by the data of the secondary calculation data area A, the ratio of the cumulative number of bonuses in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data of the secondary calculation data area C is divided by the data of the secondary calculation data area A. By dividing, the ratio of the cumulative number of consecutive cards in slot machine 1 is calculated, and by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area D by the data in the secondary calculation data area A, the cumulative total in slot machine 1 is calculated. Calculate the ratio of the number of sheets to be paid out in the advantageous section.

Further, the main control unit 41 updates the aggregated data areas f', E', and F'to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then the aggregated data in the aggregated data area. It is determined whether or not the data set in the area E'has reached 3 bytes, and if it has not reached 3 bytes, the data of the aggregated data area E'is provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the generated 2-byte secondary operation data area E. On the other hand, when it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area E.

Further, for the aggregated data area f', a value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area f'by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area f "provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. , It is determined whether or not the data set in the aggregated data area f "has reached 3 bytes, and if it has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the aggregated data area f" is used as the non-gaming data of the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data area f provided in the area. On the other hand, when it reaches 3 bytes, the extraction process is performed and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary calculation data area f. ..

Further, it refers to whether or not the aggregation data area f has been extracted, and if the aggregation data area f has not been extracted, the number of games in the predetermined period of 6000 is set to the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary calculation data area g provided in. On the other hand, when the aggregated data area f is subjected to the extraction process, the extraction process is performed for 6000, which is the number of games in a predetermined period, and the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area f is specified. The data for 16 bits below the highest level is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data area g.

Further, for the aggregated data area F', the value obtained by multiplying the data of the aggregated data area F'by 100 is set in the 3-byte primary calculation data area F "provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. , Whether or not the aggregation data area E has been extracted, and if the aggregation data area E has not been extracted, the data of the aggregation data area F ”is transferred to the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the provided 2-byte secondary calculation data area F. On the other hand, when the aggregation process is performed on the aggregated data area E, the extraction process is performed, the highest level specified in the extraction process of the aggregated data area E is specified, and the data for 16 bits below the highest level is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary calculation data area F.

Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary calculation data area F by the data in the secondary calculation data area E to calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total total number of games in the slot machine 1. Then, by dividing the data in the secondary calculation data area f by the secondary calculation data area g, the ratio of the number of advantageous section games in a predetermined period is calculated.

The main control unit 41 refers to the corresponding area of the secondary calculation data area at predetermined time intervals, and determines the ratio of the total number of payouts for a predetermined period, the ratio of the total total number of payouts for a predetermined period, and the number of consecutive payouts for a predetermined period. Percentage, percentage of the number of bonuses paid out for a predetermined period, percentage of the number of coupons paid out in an advantageous section for a predetermined period, percentage of the total number of coupons paid out in a row, percentage of total number of bonuses paid out, percentage of total number of coupons paid out in an advantageous section By specifying the ratio and setting it in the output buffer of the game machine information display 50, the game machine information display 50 is displayed.

The main control unit 41 calculates the secondary calculation data based on the data of the first to fifth ring buffers when the predetermined period elapses, that is, updates the secondary calculation data every time the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, the previously calculated secondary calculation data is maintained until the predetermined period elapses, and the game machine information display 50 displays the total number of payouts and the like based on the secondary calculation data. After that, until the next predetermined period elapses, the total number of payouts and the like at the time when the previous predetermined period elapses will be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

By specifying the number of advantageous section games and the cumulative number of advantageous section games in a predetermined period in addition to the above-mentioned total number of payouts and the like for each predetermined time, and setting the output buffer of the game machine information display 50. , It may be configured to be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

Further, in this embodiment, when the total cumulative data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, a process for avoiding the overflow is executed. Erase the related data once.

Specifically, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data are initialized. At this time, the data related to the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number is all the data used in the calculation (in this embodiment, the total number of payments, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, the number of games, and the advantageous section game. You may want to initialize all the aggregated data of the number of times, or when some relatively relevant data (for example, the aggregated data A'of the total number of payouts reaches the specified number as the total accumulated data). The total data B'ratio of the number of consecutive payouts used together with the aggregated data A'when calculating the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the aggregated data C'of the number of bonus payouts, When the aggregated data D'of the number of advantageous section payouts and the aggregated data E'of the number of games as the total cumulative data reach the specified number, it is used together with the aggregated data E'when calculating the advantageous section ratio (F / E). The aggregated data F') of the number of advantageous section games to be obtained may be initialized.

When the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data are reduced by a predetermined ratio (for example, the total cumulative data). To avoid overflow of the total cumulative data by multiplying the current value by 0.5, etc.), at this time, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data. All the data in the above may be reduced by a predetermined ratio, or the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and some data that are relatively related to the total cumulative data may be reduced by a predetermined ratio. You can do it.

In addition, when the total cumulative data reaches a predetermined specified number, when the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data are initialized or decreased, the total cumulative data The specified number may be the maximum value of the total accumulated data (the maximum value of the value that can be stored in each aggregated data area (3 bytes) of the RAM 41c), or a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value of the total accumulated data (the maximum value). It may be a value that is well-cut within 3 bytes, for example, "16000000 (decimal number)").

Further, in this embodiment, when the total cumulative data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, it is related once as a process for avoiding the overflow. Although the configuration is such that the data is erased, the counting may be stopped without erasing the related data.

Further, the data displayed on the game machine information display 50 may be executed for each game, or may be executed only for the game in which the prize is generated.

Since the microcomputer used in the game machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, in this embodiment, the calculation is performed by using the following first calculation method. In the first calculation method, first, the value of the numerator is multiplied by 100. Then, this value multiplied by 100 is divided by the value of the denominator. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing the calculation after the decimal point. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

As the calculation method performed by the microcomputer that cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the following second calculation method may be used. In the second calculation method, first, the value of the denominator is divided by 100. Then, the value of the numerator is divided by the value divided by 100. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing the calculation after the decimal point. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, division may be performed by 1000.

In addition, the microcomputer used in the game machine can only perform calculations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower bits are truncated as necessary in order to facilitate the calculation. By using such a calculation method, the calculation by the microcomputer used in the game machine becomes easy, but an error occurs. However, as the calculation period becomes longer, the error is reduced and the value is approximated to the original value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the value to be calculated is 2 bytes or less, the calculation is performed using the value as it is without truncating the lower bits, and the value to be calculated is 2 bytes. When it exceeds, the operation is performed using the value obtained by truncating the lower bits.

In the conventional slot machine, the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on a predetermined design value.

However, with such a conventional method, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value after the installation in the game store.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason, the period from the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c to the present) in the total number of medals given Since the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section), are calculated and displayed on the game machine information display 50. It is possible to confirm whether or not the slot machine 1 is controlled in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value even after it is shipped to the market.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of games controlled in an advantageous period (advantageous section) in a specific period (between the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or the period from the initialization of the data of the RAM 41c to the present for some reason). Since the advantageous section ratio, which is a ratio, is calculated and displayed on the game machine information display 50, it is possible to confirm information that is the degree of gambling even after the game is shipped to the market.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous section during a specific period (between the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or the period from the initialization of the data of the RAM 41c to the present for some reason) is advantageous. The section ratio is calculated and displayed on the game machine information display 50, but for a specific period (the period from the past 6000 games, the factory shipment, or the period from the initialization of the RAM 41c data to the present). In, the ratio of the number of games controlled by bonuses such as BB and RB may be calculated and displayed on the game machine information display 50. Even in such a configuration, the degree of gambling even after being shipped to the market. You can check the information that becomes.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). When calculating the ratio, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by different calculation methods depending on whether or not these original data satisfy the predetermined conditions. The optimum calculation method can be selected according to the data. For example, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section of a specific period are within 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of the calculation can be used as it is without processing, and the continuous payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantage. While calculating the section payout ratio, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section in a specific period exceed 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of the calculation is processed into data within 2 bytes. By calculating the joint combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated by the optimum calculation method with less error.

In this embodiment, the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the first period to the total number of medals awarded in the first period (between the past 6000 games). The total number of medals awarded in the second period (the period from the factory shipment or the period from the initialization of the RAM 41c data to the present), the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio. The consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the second period, are calculated, and the game machine information is obtained. In addition to being displayed on the display 50, when calculating the joint combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period, the consecutive combination payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio in the second period, Even when calculating the advantageous section payout ratio, the joint combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by a common calculation method, but the consecutive combination payout ratio and the combination in the first period The method of calculating the material payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio may be different from the method of calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period. For example, in the above example, in calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the numerator is multiplied by 100 so that the result is%, but the denominator is multiplied by 1/100. If the result is%, the total number of payouts in the first period can be kept within 2 bytes. In such a configuration, when calculating the joint combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period, the continuous combination payout is used as it is without processing the data that is the basis of the calculation. While calculating the ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, when calculating the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period, the data that is the basis of the calculation is 2 By calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio after processing the data into bytes or less, the continuous combination payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio are calculated by the optimum method according to the amount of data used. It becomes possible to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout for a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). Since the data used to calculate the ratio is stored separately from the total number of payouts in the specific period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section in the specific period, the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section in the specific period are stored separately. The payout ratio can be calculated by a simple procedure.

Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games), the predetermined number of games is divided by the predetermined number (15). 15 sets that store the total number of payouts during the period of the number (400 games), the number of bonuses paid out during the predetermined number of games, the number of consecutive payouts during the predetermined number of games, and the number of advantageous section payouts during the predetermined number of games. A ring buffer consisting of the above buffers is provided, and the total number of payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, and the number of advantageous section payouts stored in these ring buffers are added up to obtain the total number of payouts in a specific number of games. , The number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive coins paid out, and the number of advantageous section payouts are calculated, and the continuous role payout ratio, the bonuses payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of a specific number of games (6000 games) are calculated. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the latest specific number of games.

Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the advantageous section ratio in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games), the advantageous section of the period of the predetermined number of games (400 games) obtained by dividing the specific number of games by the predetermined number (15). A ring buffer consisting of 15 sets of buffers for storing the number of games is provided, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the period of a specific number of games is calculated by adding up the number of games in the advantageous section stored in these ring buffers. The number of games in the advantageous section in the period of the specific number of games (6000 games) is calculated, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the latest specific number of games can be easily calculated.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being housed in the board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the game machine information display 50 has the game control board 40. The display contents can be visually recognized via the substrate case 120a in a state of being housed in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a. Further, the substrate case 120a is designed to be sealed after accommodating the game control substrate 40, and in the sealed state, the sealing cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine information display 50 from being illegally worked.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to display the game RAM area in which data according to the progress of the game is stored in the RAM 41c, and the game machine information display 50 for displaying the bonus payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, and the like. When the initialization condition of the RAM 41c is satisfied due to the transition to the setting change state or the like, the data in the game RAM area is initialized while the non-game RAM area is provided. Since the data in the RAM area is not initialized, even if the initialization conditions are satisfied, the bonus payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. can be calculated and displayed in consideration of the data before that. ..

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). A game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The machine information display 50 is configured to display, and the game machine information display 50 makes it possible to visually recognize the display contents from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. At the same time, the board case 120a enclosed in the game control board 40 is arranged inside the housing 1a, and the inside of the housing 1a hinders the visibility of the game machine information display 50. Since it is configured so that there is no such thing, it is possible to check the display of the game machine information display 50 only by opening the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, and based on the display of the game machine information display 50, It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state based on the design value.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals given in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the setting is changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carry-over of the bonus, the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or the bonus being carried over is cleared. The game was played more than the specified number while the bonus was being carried over, the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section was performed, or the connection failure occurred in the game machine information display 50, that is, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory It is designed to detect that there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the payout ratio, the joint payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc., and the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the consecutive Since it is detected that an event has occurred in which the correct information such as the winning combination payout ratio and the advantageous section payout ratio may not be properly displayed by the game machine information display 50, such information should not be displayed properly. You can prevent fraud.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals given in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and when the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio reaches a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, By executing the process to avoid overflow and deleting the related data once, the upper limit is the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio. Since it is avoided to exceed the limit, even if the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the joint payout ratio exceeds the upper limit, the continuous payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout The ratio can be calculated and this information can be displayed on the game machine information display 50.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals given in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. The main control unit 41 periodically displays information such as the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio on the game machine information display 50 in the machine information display 50. The display is switched to the target (every 30 seconds in this embodiment), and these values are new values within one period until the display of these consecutive payout ratios, etc. is completed. Even if it can be updated to, since updating to a new value is restricted and the display is cycled using the original value, a lot of information such as the continuous payout ratio in the game machine information display 50 Can be displayed efficiently, and information updated at the same time is displayed as multiple types of information displayed in one cycle, so information at different times may be mixed in one cycle. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games. To calculate the bonus section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout, the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number. It is determined whether the data to be used is normal, and if at least one of these data is determined to be abnormal, the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and an abnormality is detected. Since the display to that effect (for example, "FFFF") is set to the game machine information display 50 to notify the fact, the data necessary for calculating the advantageous section ratio and the like has been initialized. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the calculation of these data is not performed normally and the advantageous section ratio or the like may not be a normal value.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals awarded during a specific period (the period from the initialization of the RAM 41c data to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason). The game mounted on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating the continuous combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 is stopped at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game, that is, at the symbol combination reel of the small winning combination to which the medal is paid out. At that time, the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer without waiting for the medals to be actually paid out and the payout is completed, so there is no need to wait for the payout accompanying the winning of the small winning combination to be completed. The data used to calculate the bonus payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be updated.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 adds the number of medals to the data counting buffer at the timing when the occurrence of a small winning combination is determined according to the progress of the game. The timing at which the numbers are added may be the timing at which medals are actually awarded due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (credit addition or detection of actual medal payout), and such a configuration is used. Therefore, when the medal is stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small winning combination to be paid out, after the medal is actually paid out and the payout is completed, the continuous combination payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio The data used in the calculation of can be updated.

Although the first and modified examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these first and modified examples, and changes and additions are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, even if there is, it is included in the present invention.

In the first embodiment and the modified example, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a bet number is set by using medals and credits as a game value has been described, but a bet number using a game ball as a game value has been described. It may be applied to a slot machine that sets the number of bets or a fully credit type slot machine that sets the number of bets using only credits as a game value. When the game ball is used as the game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the first embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Corresponds to setting the number of medals using.

Further, the value is not limited to one using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set the number of bets and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls are generated when a prize is generated. A slot machine that can pay out any value may be applied.

In the above embodiment, the slot machine as a game machine is applied, but the game machine is not limited to the slot machine 1, and the game machine other than the slot machine, such as a pachinko game machine using a game ball, has the configuration of the present invention. May be applied.

The second embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Since the configuration of the slot machine of this embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, different points will be mainly described here.

In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 can display the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 when the medals are paid out due to the winning of the small winning combination, and the medals are paid out. When the number of medals is less than 10, a one-digit number indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals paid out is 10 or more. In the case of, the number of the first digit (one's place) indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of the second digit (ten's place) is displayed. Is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, and when displaying the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the display is mainly displayed among the game auxiliary display 12. It is a configuration using 12R. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can display the navigation number (0 to 13) on the game auxiliary display 12 when performing the navigation notification, and if the navigation number is less than 10, the navigation A one-digit number indicating the number is displayed on the display 12R of the game assistance display 12, and when the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (one digit) indicating the navigation number is used for the game assistance. In addition to displaying on the display 12R of the display 12, the second digit (tens digit) number is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, and the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number. When displaying the navigation number, the display 12R is mainly used among the game auxiliary display 12, as in the case of displaying the number of medals to be paid out.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment mainly uses the first display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the medals are paid out. The number of medals is displayed, and the navigation number is displayed mainly by using the second display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56A, when the navigation notification is performed, if the navigation number is less than 10, the main control unit 41 displays a one-digit number indicating the navigation number as a game assistance display. It is displayed on the display 12L of the device 12, and when the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (one digit) indicating the navigation number is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. At the same time, by displaying the second digit (tens digit) on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Of these, the display 12L is mainly used.

In this way, in the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment, the winning combination accompanied by the payout of medals is won by the internal lottery, and the combination of the symbols of the winning combination is on the winning lines LN of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. By stopping at, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out to the player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a navigation notification is performed to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode. In the game auxiliary display 12 whose main control unit 41 directly controls the display, when paying out medals, the number of medals paid out to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation is performed. At the time of notification, it is possible to display a navigation number that can identify an advantageous stop operation mode for the player.

In such a configuration, the number of medals paid out to the player and the stop operation mode advantageous to the player are both displayed on one game auxiliary display 12, so that the displayed contents are misunderstood. There is a risk that it will end up.

On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 in which the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment displays the number of medals to be paid out as predetermined contents is composed of a plurality of displays 12L and 12R, and the main control unit 41 has predetermined contents. As a display content different from that, since it is possible to display a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the game assistance display 12, the game assistance, which is a display means for displaying a predetermined content, is possible. By displaying the navigation number using the display 12, it is possible to display the predetermined content and the navigation number without providing a new display means, and the main control unit 41 can display the plurality of displays 12L and 12R. Of these, the display 12R is mainly used as the first display to display the predetermined contents, and the display 12L is mainly used as the second display among the plurality of displays 12L and 12R to display the navigation number. , It is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the game assist display 12 which is the display means from being misidentified as whether it is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

The stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, which can be identified by the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the navigation notification, is an operation mode in which the operation is performed in any one of a plurality of operation orders, or a plurality of operation modes. It may be an operation mode in which the operation is performed at any of the different operation timings, or an operation mode in which these are combined.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the main control unit 41 displays the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12, only the number indicating the number of medals to be paid out constitutes the game auxiliary display 12. Of the plurality of indicators 12L and 12R, the first indicator 12R is mainly used to display the predetermined contents, that is, the predetermined contents are displayed using only the first display. , A configuration in which a predetermined content is displayed by using a display other than the first display as an auxiliary in addition to the first display, for example, a number indicating the number of medals to be paid out is mainly displayed on the first display 12R. In addition to displaying the display, the second display 12L may be configured to display a payout symbol (for example, "=" or "") indicating that the payout is in progress.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, only the numbers indicating the navigation numbers are displayed on the plurality of indicators 12L constituting the game auxiliary display 12. Of the 12R, the configuration is mainly displayed on the second display 12L, that is, the navigation number is displayed using only the second display. However, when the navigation number is displayed, the second display is used. In addition, a configuration in which a navigation number is displayed by using a display other than the second display as an auxiliary, for example, a navigation number among the display 12L and the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 when performing a navigation notification. The navigation symbol (for example, "." Shown in FIG. 56 (b), indicating that the navigation notification is being executed and the navigation number is being displayed on the display 12R, which is different from the display 12L that mainly displays The configuration may be such that "=") and the like shown in FIG. 56 (c) are displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize from the contents displayed on the first display 12R that the contents displayed on the second display 12L correspond to the operation mode.

Further, in the configuration in which the navigation symbol is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when performing the navigation notification, the navigation symbol may be a fixed display or a display that changes at a predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the main control unit 41 may be configured to change the navigation symbol every time a stop operation is performed, or the navigation symbol may be changed at predetermined time intervals. The configuration may be changed. In such a configuration, the navigation symbol can be easily recognized by changing the navigation symbol. Further, in the configuration in which the navigation symbol is changed each time the stop operation is performed, whether the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R performed is the first stop operation depending on the display mode of the displayed navigation symbol. , It is possible to grasp whether it is the second stop operation or the third stop operation.

The main control unit 41 of the second embodiment displays a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the game auxiliary display 12 as a display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and as a predetermined content, the number of medals to be paid out, which is information about the result of the game, is displayed, and a navigation number for notifying the operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed during the game. On the other hand, since the predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, the display period does not overlap.

In the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 has a navigation number capable of identifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R as display contents different from the predetermined contents in the game auxiliary display 12. The number of medals to be paid out, which is the predetermined content, and the navigation number different from the predetermined content are configured so that the period displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 does not overlap, but the predetermined content is displayed. The display content different from the predetermined content may be content whose display periods may overlap or may not overlap. For example, the displayed periods may overlap. In a configuration in which the main control unit 41 controls an error state when an abnormality is detected and disables control related to the game such as paying medals in the error state, the display content is different from the predetermined content. The game auxiliary display 12 may be configured to display an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred when the error state is controlled. Even in such a configuration, the game auxiliary display is displayed by mainly using the second display 12L, which is different from the first display 12R mainly used when displaying the number of medals to be paid out, to display the error code. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding whether the display content displayed in 12 is an error code or the number of medals to be paid out as a predetermined content.

In the predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment, lighting mode data, which is display data for displaying the predetermined display content on the game auxiliary display 12, is lit in advance for each display content. The aspect data table is stored, and the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number by the navigation notification as the display content other than the predetermined content even when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content. Even in the case of making the lighting mode data table, the common lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table can be used to display predetermined display contents on the indicators 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to reduce the amount of display data for displaying a predetermined display content on the game auxiliary display 12.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

In a conventional game machine, it is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on a predetermined design value, but after being installed in a game store, it is based on a predetermined design value. It was difficult to confirm whether or not the control was advantageous.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of confirming whether or not it is controlled advantageously based on a predetermined design value. And.

The game machine of configuration 1-1 is
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A game value-giving means for giving game value (medals)
Advantageous control means for advantageous control for the player (control of BB, RB, advantageous section by the main control unit 41),
To the total number of game values granted during a specific period (the period from the time when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present during the past 6000 games, at the time of shipment from the factory, or for some reason) (total number of payouts) The total number of specific advantageous period grants (number of consecutive payouts, number of bonuses paid out, number of advantageous section payouts), which is the total number of game values granted in the advantageously controlled period (BB, RB, advantageous section) of the specific period occupied. ), Which is the calculation method for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio (joint combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio).
A notification means (game machine information display 50) that identifiablely notifies the specific advantageous period grant ratio (continuous combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio) calculated by the calculation means, and
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the specific advantageous period grant, which is the total number of game values granted in the advantageously controlled period of the specific period, which is the total number of game values granted in the specific period. Since the specific advantageous period grant ratio, which is the ratio of the total number, is calculated and is identifiablely notified by the notification means, whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value even after being shipped to the market is determined. You can check.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-2 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-1.
It is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the notification means (game machine information display 50) (inside the housing 1a, for example, at a position on the display side of the game machine information display 50, a component such as a reel). In general, no other boards are provided, and the wiring that connects electronic components does not pass through, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the notification means, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is controlled advantageously based on the design value.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-1 or 1-2.
An event has occurred in which the notified specific advantageous period grant ratio may not be appropriate (for example, the setting is changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section, or during the carry-over of the bonus, and the bonus or advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Detection means to detect that the bonus has been cleared, that the game has been played more than the specified number while the bonus has been carried over, and that the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section has been performed. It is characterized by being prepared.
According to this feature, since it is detected that an event has occurred in which the notified specific advantageous period grant ratio may not be appropriate, fraud that prevents the notified specific advantageous period grant ratio from becoming inappropriate is performed. Can be prevented.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-3.
Excess avoidance means (overflow) for preventing the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) required for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio from exceeding the upper limit value (numerical value that can be represented by 3 bytes). It is characterized by having a process to avoid).
According to this feature, it is avoided that the numerical value required for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio exceeds the upper limit value, so that the numerical value required for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio exceeds the upper limit value. Even if a situation is reached, the specific advantageous period grant ratio can be notified.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-4.
The notification means periodically (every 30 seconds) switches and notifies a plurality of types of information including a specific advantageous period grant ratio, and information updated at the same time as a plurality of types of information notified in one cycle. It is characterized by notifying.
According to this feature, since a plurality of types of information including a specific advantageous period grant ratio are periodically switched and notified, a large amount of information can be efficiently notified and a plurality of types of information notified in one cycle. Since the information updated at the same time is notified as the information of the above, it is possible to prevent the information of different times from being mixed in one cycle.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-5.
The initialization notification means (game machine information display 50) for notifying that the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) required for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio has been initialized, and
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, since the initialization notification means notifies that the numerical value required for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio has been initialized, the numerical value required for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio is By being initialized, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the specific advantageous period grant ratio is not a normal value.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-6.
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each.
By stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result can be derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
The calculation means is provided with a numerical update means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio.
The numerical value updating means waits for the granting of the gaming value (medal) to be completed when the display result (combination of symbols of small wins) in which the granting prize accompanied by the granting of the gaming value (medal) is derived. It is characterized by updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio (continuous combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio).
According to this feature, when the display result in which the grant prize is generated is derived, the numerical value required to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio without waiting for the grant of the game value to be completed is updated. Can be done.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-6.
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each.
By stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result can be derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
The calculation means is provided with a numerical update means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio.
The numerical value updating means waits for the granting of the gaming value (medals) to be completed when the display result (combination of symbols of small wins) in which the granting prize accompanied by the granting of the gaming value (medals) is derived. It is characterized by updating the numerical values (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio (joint combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio).
According to this feature, when the display result in which the grant prize is generated is derived, it is possible to update the numerical value required to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio after the grant of the game value is actually completed. it can.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-8.
A predetermined total number of grants that stores the total number of grants for a predetermined period (total number of payouts), which is the total number of game values granted in a predetermined period (between 400 games) obtained by dividing a specific period (between the past 6000 games) by a predetermined number (15). The total number of predetermined advantageous period grants (number of consecutive payouts, combination) which is the total number of game values granted in the storage area and the advantageously controlled period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the predetermined period (between 400 games). A predetermined number (15) or more of storage areas for storing the number of items to be paid out and the number of sheets to be paid out in the advantageous section are provided (ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers).
The calculation means stores the total number of grants for a specific period (total number of payouts in the past 6000 games) in the predetermined total number storage area (ring buffer including 15 sets of buffers) for a predetermined number (total number of grants for a predetermined period). Calculated by adding up the number of payouts), and the total number of specific advantageous period grants (number of consecutive wins paid out during the past 6000 games, number of bonus payouts, number of payouts in advantageous sections) is stored in the storage area for the total number of given advantageous periods. It is characterized in that it is calculated by adding up the total number of predetermined advantageous period grants (number of consecutive payouts, number of bonuses paid out, number of advantageous section payouts) stored in a ring buffer provided with 15 sets of buffers.
According to this feature, the total number of grants for a specific period and the total number of grants for a specific advantageous period in the latest specific period can be easily calculated.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-9.
It is equipped with a storage means (RAM 41c) capable of retaining the stored contents even when the power supply is stopped.
The storage means has a first storage area (game RAM area) in which data according to the progress of the game is stored, and a second storage area in which data necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio is stored. (Non-gaming RAM area) and
When the initialization condition is satisfied, the data stored in the first storage area (game RAM area) is initialized, while the data stored in the second storage area (non-game RAM area). Is characterized by not being initialized.
According to this feature, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, the specific advantageous period grant ratio can be calculated and notified by adding the data before that.

The game machine of configuration 1-11
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
Advantageous control means for advantageous control for the player (control of BB, RB, advantageous section by the main control unit 41),
The number of games that is advantageously controlled in the specific period, which is the number of games in the specific period (the past 6000 games, the period from the factory default or the period from the initialization of the RAM 41c data for some reason to the present). A calculation means for calculating a specific advantageous period game number ratio (advantageous section ratio), which is a ratio of a specific advantageous game number (advantageous section game number), which is (BB, RB, the number of games controlled in an advantageous section).
A notification means (game machine information display 50) for identifiablely notifying the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period (advantageous section ratio) calculated by the calculation means, and
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, which is the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, which is the number of games controlled advantageously in the specific period to the number of games in the specific period, is calculated and notified. Since the notification is identifiable by means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control is advantageous based on a predetermined design value even after the game is shipped to the market.

In the configurations 1-1 and 1-11, controlling favorably for the player means the probability that a specific prize is allowed to occur, the probability that a specific prize is generated, and the probability that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given. The control to raise the probability, the control to notify the operation mode advantageous to the player, and the like are applicable.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-12 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-11.
It is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the notification means (game machine information display 50) (inside the housing 1a, for example, at a position on the display side of the game machine information display 50, a component such as a reel). In general, no other boards are provided, and the wiring that connects electronic components does not pass through, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the notification means, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is controlled advantageously based on the design value.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-13 is the gaming machine according to configuration 1-11 or 1-12.
An event in which the reported specific advantage period game number ratio may not be appropriate (for example, the setting was changed during the bonus, during the advantage section, or during the carry-over of the bonus, and the bonus or advantage section was forcibly terminated. , A detection means that detects that the bonus being carried over has been cleared, that the game has been played more than the specified number while the bonus has been carried over, or that the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section has occurred. It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is detected that an event has occurred in which the notified specific advantageous period game number ratio may not be appropriate, so that the notified specific advantageous period game number ratio becomes inappropriate. Fraud can be prevented.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-13.
Excess avoidance means (overflow) for preventing the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) required for the calculation means to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period to exceed the upper limit value (numerical value that can be represented by 3 bytes). It is characterized by having a process to avoid the above.
According to this feature, the numerical value required to calculate the specific advantageous period game number ratio is prevented from exceeding the upper limit value, so that the numerical value required to calculate the specific advantageous period game number ratio is the upper limit value. Even if the situation exceeds the limit, the ratio of the number of games during the specific advantageous period can be notified.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-14.
The notification means periodically (every 30 seconds) switches and notifies a plurality of types of information including the ratio of the number of games during a specific advantageous period, and is updated at the same time as a plurality of types of information notified in one cycle. It is characterized by notifying information.
According to this feature, since a plurality of types of information including the ratio of the number of games in a specific advantageous period are periodically switched and notified, a large amount of information can be efficiently notified and a plurality of information notified in one cycle. Since the information updated at the same time is notified as the type of information, it is possible to prevent the information at different times from being mixed in one cycle.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-15.
The calculation means is provided with an initialization notification means (game machine information display 50) for notifying that the numerical value required for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period has been initialized.
According to this feature, it is notified that the numerical value necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period has been initialized by the initialization notification means, so that it is necessary to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period. By initializing the numerical value, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period is not a normal value.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-16.
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each.
By stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result can be derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
The calculation means is provided with a numerical update means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period.
The numerical value updating means waits for the granting of the game value (medal) to be completed when the display result (combination of symbols of small winning combinations) in which the grant prize accompanied by the grant of the game value (medal) is derived. It is characterized by updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) required to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period (the ratio of the advantageous section).
According to this feature, when the display result in which the grant prize is generated is derived, the numerical value required to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period is updated without waiting for the grant of the game value to be completed. be able to.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-16.
It is equipped with variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variablely display a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each.
By stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), the display result can be derived, and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
The calculation means is provided with a numerical update means for updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period (advantageous section ratio).
The numerical value updating means waits for the granting of the gaming value (medals) to be completed when the display result (combination of symbols of small wins) in which the granting prize accompanied by the granting of the gaming value (medals) is derived. It is characterized by updating the numerical value (aggregated data consisting of 3 bytes) required to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period (the ratio of the advantageous section).
According to this feature, when the display result in which the grant prize is generated is derived, the numerical value required to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period after the grant of the game value is actually completed is updated. Can be done.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-18.
A predetermined number of games (BB, RB, number of games controlled in an advantageous section) in a predetermined period (between 400 games) obtained by dividing a specific period (between the past 6000 games) by a predetermined number (15). A predetermined number of advantageous period games (15) or more storage areas for storing the number of advantageous period games (the number of advantageous section games) are provided (ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers).
The calculation means stores a predetermined number of advantageous period games (the number of advantageous section games between the past 6000 games) in a predetermined advantageous period game number storage area (ring buffer provided with 15 sets of buffers) for a predetermined number of games. It is characterized by being calculated by adding up the number of period games (the number of advantageous section games).
According to this feature, the number of games in a specific advantageous period in the latest specific period can be easily calculated.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-11 to 1-19.
It is equipped with a storage means (RAM 41c) capable of retaining the stored contents even when the power supply is stopped.
The storage means stores a first storage area (game RAM area) in which data according to the progress of the game is stored, and a second storage in which data necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games in a specific advantageous period is stored. Has an area (non-gaming RAM area) and
When the initialization condition (setting change operation, etc.) is satisfied, the data stored in the first storage area (game RAM area) is initialized, while the second storage area. The feature is that the data stored in (non-game RAM area) is not initialized.
According to this feature, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, the number of games in a specific advantageous period can be calculated and notified by adding the data before that.

The gaming machine of configuration 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 1-1 to 1-20.
Game control means (main control unit 41) that controls the game,
A game control board (game control board 40) on which the game control means is mounted, and
A board case (board case 120a) that accommodates the game control board and cannot be opened without leaving a trace.
With
The notification means (game machine information display 50) is mounted on the game control board (game control board 40), and the notification content can be confirmed in a state where the game control board is housed in the board case. (In the substrate case 120a, an entry part for entering a seal sticker and an opener, a label for management information, a sticking part to which the label is attached, a display part on which management information is printed and engraved, and a heat dissipation hole. , Parts such as a fan for heat dissipation are provided avoiding the position on the display side of the game machine information display 50)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the notification means is mounted on the game control board, and the notification content can be confirmed in a state where the game control board is housed in an unopenable board case without leaving a trace. It is possible to prevent improper work by means.

As a conventional game machine, for example, a program related to the progress of a game for performing a lottery or an operation of each part according to an operation of a player, and an abnormality detection (for example, an abnormality winning determination) that is not directly related to the progress of the game. ) Etc. are mixed and stored in one storage area, but a program related to the progress of the game in one storage area and a program not directly related to the progress of the game are mixed. Then, it was difficult to determine which program was related to the progress of the game.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily distinguishing between a program related to the progress of a game and a program not related to the progress of a game. To do.

The game machine of configuration 2-1
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A storage means (ROM41b, RAM41c) having a storage area capable of storing data, and
Allowed area setting means (setting based on HW parameters by the main control unit 41) capable of setting an area that allows predetermined control (program running, data access) among the storage areas, and
With
The storage area is
The first storage area (game program area) in which the game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored, and
A second storage area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored,
An unused area (unused area) allocated to the area in front of the rear storage area (non-game program area) allocated to the rear of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area). Unused area 1) and
Including
The permission area setting means is set as an area for permitting the predetermined control (running of the program, data access) for each of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a first storage area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a second storage area in which a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. , Are allocated separately, and an unused area is allocated to the area in front of the rear storage area allocated to the rear of the first storage area and the second storage area, so that the game program and the non-game program The game program and the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. Further, since predetermined control is permitted only in the storage area set by the permission area setting means, and each of the first storage area and the second storage area is set as an area in which the predetermined control is permitted, the malicious program. It is possible to prevent unintended control due to incorrect data.

The game machine of configuration 2-2
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A storage means (ROM41b, RAM41c) having a storage area capable of storing data, and
Allowed area setting means (setting based on HW parameters by the main control unit 41) capable of setting an area that allows predetermined control (program running, data access) among the storage areas, and
With
The storage area is
The first storage area (game program area) in which the game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored, and
A second storage area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored,
An unused area (unused area) allocated to the area in front of the rear storage area (non-game program area) allocated to the rear of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area). Unused area 1) and
Including
From the front storage area (game program area) allocated to the front of the first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area) to the rear storage area (non-game program area). It is characterized in that the area is collectively set as an area for permitting the predetermined control (program running, data access).
According to this feature, a first storage area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored and a second storage area in which a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. , Are allocated separately, and an unused area is allocated to the area in front of the rear storage area allocated to the rear of the first storage area and the second storage area, so that the game program and the non-game program The game program and the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area. In addition, predetermined control is permitted only in the storage area set by the permission area setting means, and the front storage area allocated to the front of the first storage area and the second storage area is allocated to the rear of the second storage area. Since the area up to the storage area is collectively set as an area that allows predetermined control, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or invalid data.

In Configurations 2-1 and 2-2, the front and back of the storage area are the magnitude relations of the address values assigned to the storage area, and the smaller address is the front and the larger address is the rear. Therefore, the rear storage area allocated to the rear of the first storage area and the second storage area in the means 1 and 2 is the address value assigned to the first storage area and the second storage area. The storage area with the larger value corresponds. Further, the front storage area allocated to the front of the first storage area and the second storage area in the means 2 is the smaller of the allocated address values of the first storage area and the second storage area. Storage area is applicable.
Further, in configurations 2-1 and 2-2, the unused area may be allocated in front of the rear storage area, and the front storage area, the unused area, and the rear storage area may be allocated adjacent to each other. However, another storage area may be allocated between the front storage area and the unused area.
Further, in the configurations 2-1 and 2-2, setting the area for permitting predetermined control may mean setting the area itself for permitting predetermined control, or setting the area for prohibiting predetermined control. As a result, an area that allows predetermined control may be set.
Further, in the configuration 2-1 setting of each of the first storage area and the second storage area as an area for permitting the predetermined control means that when each of these areas is set, the predetermined control is performed only in the area. It may be set as an area to be permitted, or may be set as an area to permit the predetermined control together with other areas adjacent to the area.
Further, in the configuration 2-2, the area from the front storage area allocated to the front to the rear storage area of the first storage area and the second storage area is collectively set as an area for permitting the predetermined control. May be set as an area that allows the predetermined control collectively only in the area from the front storage area to the rear storage area when setting the area, or may be set in the area from the front storage area to the rear storage area. Other adjacent areas may also be collectively set as an area that allows the predetermined control.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 2-1 or 2-2.
The predetermined control is characterized in that it is a control (data access) for accessing a storage area (program / data area).
According to this feature, since control for accessing an area other than the area set by the permitted area setting means among the storage areas is not permitted, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or invalid data.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-3.
The predetermined control is characterized in that it is a control (running of a program) for executing a program stored in a storage area (program).
According to this feature, since control to execute a program stored in an area other than the area set by the permitted area setting means in the storage area is not permitted, unintended control by an invalid program or invalid data is performed. Can be prevented.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-4.
The unused area is characterized in that a specific value (0) is stored in all areas.
According to this feature, since a specific value is stored in all the unused areas, the first storage area and the second storage area can be easily distinguished from the unused area, and the unused area can be easily distinguished. Even if invalid data is stored in the area, it can be easily found.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-5.
The first storage area (game program area) and the second storage area (non-game program area) are both areas starting from an address (0H) having the same lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first storage area and the second storage area can be easily distinguished from other areas.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-6.
A calling means (CALLV instruction) that identifies the address corresponding to the area in which the program to be called is stored based on the upper address and the lower address, and calls the program from the area corresponding to the specified address.
A storage means (vector table) for storing a specific value (08H) and
With
The specific program (frequently used subroutine) of the game program (game program) or the non-game program (non-game program) is stored in an area whose upper address corresponds to the address of the specific value (08H). Ori,
When the specific program (frequently used subroutine) is called, the calling means specifies an upper address based on a specific value (08H) stored in the storage means (vector table), and also specifies a designated lower address. It is characterized by identifying the address.
According to this feature, a higher-level address that constitutes a part of an address used when calling a specific program of a game program or a non-game program is stored in the storage means as a specific value in advance, and is stored in the storage means. Since the address is specified based on a specific value, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling a specific program.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-7.
An interrupt processing execution means that executes processing according to an interrupt program (timer interrupt processing (main)) based on an interrupt, and
Address storage means (vector table) that can store the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)),
A determination means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored).
When it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within the predetermined range, the start limiting means (in the main control unit 41, the address of the vector table is in the program area of the program or the like. If it is not the area actually stored, it will not be started),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt process from being executed in advance.

The gaming machine of configuration 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 2-1 to 2-8.
Setting means for setting control means (setting of various functions performed by referring to HW parameters) and
After the setting by the setting means is performed, the processing means for executing the process based on the control program (game program or non-game program) and the processing means.
An interrupt generation means (timer circuit 509) that generates an interrupt when the interrupt condition is satisfied, and
An interrupt process execution means that executes an interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)) based on an interrupt, and
An interrupt limiting means that limits the occurrence of interrupts by the interrupt generating means,
Including
The interrupt limiting means includes a first interrupt limiting means (setting of interrupt prohibition by startup setting) that limits the occurrence of interrupt before the process based on the control program (initial setting process) is started. , A second interrupt limiting means (setting for prohibiting interrupts by the initial setting process) that limits the occurrence of interrupts at the start of processing based on the control program.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-1
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A first storage means (ROM41b) having a first storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program), and
A control means (main control unit 41) that performs control based on a program stored in the first storage means, and
A second storage means (RAM 41c) having a second storage area (game RAM area, non-game RAM area) capable of storing variable data used by the control means when performing control based on the program.
With
The first storage area is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored, and
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored,
Including
The second storage area is
A game variation data area (game RAM area) capable of storing game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the game program, and
A non-game variation data area (non-game RAM area) capable of storing non-game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the non-game program, and
Including
When the first initialization condition is satisfied (at the end of one game, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, after the setting change is completed), the control means has the game variation data area ( When at least a part of the game RAM area) is initialized and the second initialization condition (when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change, when there is an abnormality in RAM at the start of setting change) is satisfied, the game It is characterized in that at least a part of the variable data area for use (game RAM area) is initialized, and at least a part of the variable data area for non-game (non-game RAM area) is initialized.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area. Are assigned separately to each other, so that the gaming program and the non-gaming program can be easily identified according to the difference in the storage area. In addition, a game variation data area that can store game variation data used when performing control based on a game program and a non-game variation data area that can store non-game variation data used when performing control based on a non-game program. Since the variable data area and the variable data area are assigned separately, the variable data for games and the variable data for non-games can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the control means is initially set. It is possible to initialize only the variable data area for games according to the difference in the conversion conditions, or to initialize both the variable data area for games and the variable data area for non-games, and appropriate variable data depending on the situation. Can be initialized.

In the configuration 3-1 the control means may be any one that initializes at least a part of the game fluctuation data area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, and all of the game fluctuation data area. It may be the one that initializes the area of.
Further, in the configuration 3-1 the control means initializes at least a part of the game variation data area when the second initialization condition is satisfied, and at least a part of the non-game variation data area. Anything that initializes may be used, and all areas of the game variable data area may be initialized, all areas of the non-game data area may be initialized, or the game may be initialized. All areas of both the variable data area and the non-gaming data area may be initialized.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-2 is the gaming machine according to configuration 3-1.
A program that initializes the game variable data area (game RAM area) (game area initialization process) and a program that initializes the non-game variable data area (non-game RAM area) (non-game area initialization process). ) Is characterized by being composed of separate programs.
According to this feature, since the game program does not need to initialize the non-game variable data area, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. Further, the program for initializing the variable data area for games can be shared both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 3-1 or 3-2.
The first initialization condition is characterized in that it is satisfied for each game unit (at the end of one game).
According to this feature, it is possible to initialize unnecessary game variation data related to the progress of the game for each game unit.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 3-1 to 3-3.
The second initialization condition is characterized in that it is satisfied based on the initialization operation (setting change operation) being performed.
According to this feature, both the game variation data and the non-game variation data can be initialized based on the initialization operation of the game clerk.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 3-1 to 3-4.
The game variation data area includes an unused area (unused area 3) that is not used when performing control based on the game program or when performing control based on the non-game program.
The control means may use the first initialization condition (at the end of one game, at the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, after the end of setting change) or the second initialization condition (change of setting). Initialize at least a part of the unused area (unused area 3) when at least one of (when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start and when there is an abnormality in the RAM at the start of setting change) is satisfied. It is characterized by doing.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 3-1 to 5-5.
It is characterized in that interruption is prohibited during the execution of the non-game program.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated due to the execution of an unintended process during the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 3-1 to 3-6.
The second storage area is separately provided with a stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program and a stack area (non-game stack area) for saving data used by the non-game program. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas provided separately, so that the stack area can be easily managed.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 3-1 to 3-7.
An address storage means (vector table) that can store the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process, and
A determination means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored).
When it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within the predetermined range, the start limiting means (in the main control unit 41, the address of the vector table is in the program area of the program or the like. If it is not the area actually stored, it will not be started),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt process from being executed in advance.

The gaming machine of configuration 3-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 3-1 to 3-8.
It is provided with a setting means (setting of various functions performed by referring to the HW parameter) for setting the control means.
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after the setting by the setting means is performed, and prohibits interruption (starting) before the processing based on the program is started. Interruption prohibition setting by time setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

The game machine of configuration 4-1
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A first storage means (ROM41b) having a first storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program), and
A control means (main control unit 41) that performs control based on a program stored in the first storage means, and
A second storage means (RAM 41c) having a second storage area (game RAM area, non-game RAM area) capable of storing variable data used by the control means when performing control based on the program.
A holding means (backup power supply) for holding the data stored in the second storage area stage (RAM 41c) for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
With
The first storage area stage (ROM41b) is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored, and
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored,
Including
The second storage area (RAM 41c) is
A game variation data area (game RAM area) capable of storing game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the game program, and
A non-game variation data area (non-game RAM area) capable of storing non-game variation data used when the control means performs control based on the non-game program, and
Including
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the control means has the game variable data area (game) among the data held in the second storage area (RAM 41c) by the holding means (backup power supply). Based on the game variation data stored in the RAM area), it is determined whether the stored contents are normal (determination of whether the RAM is destroyed), and when it is determined to be normal, the game variation. It is characterized in that control is started based on the game variation data stored in the data area (game RAM area) and the non-game variation data stored in the non-game variation data area (non-game RAM area). It is supposed to be.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area. Are assigned separately to each other, so that the gaming program and the non-gaming program can be easily identified according to the difference in the storage area. In addition, a game variation data area that can store game variation data used when performing control based on a game program and a non-game variation data area that can store non-game variation data used when performing control based on a non-game program. Since the variable data area and the variable data area are assigned separately, the variable data for games and the variable data for non-games can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area, and the control means is the game. Whether or not the stored contents are normal based on the game fluctuation data stored in the game fluctuation data area among the data held in the second storage area by the holding means when the power supply to the machine is started. Is determined, and when it is determined to be normal, control is started based on the game variation data stored in the game variation data and the game variation data stored in the non-game variation data. By omitting the judgment of whether or not the non-game data that does not hinder the progress of the game is normal, the load when resuming the control is reduced while ensuring that the progress of the game can be performed normally. Can be done.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-2 is the gaming machine according to configuration 4-1.
The game variable data area (game RAM area) is not used when performing control based on the game program (game program) or when performing control based on the non-game program (non-game program). Including unused area (unused area 3)
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the control means determines whether or not the stored contents including the unused area (unused area 3) in the game variable data area (game RAM area) are normal. It is characterized by judging.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent invalid data from being stored in the unused area.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 4-1 or 4-2.
When it is determined that the stored contents are not normal, the control means controls the error state (error processing), and the game variable data area (game RAM area) and the non-game area are released as the error state is released. It is characterized by initializing both game variable data areas (non-game RAM areas).
According to this feature, when it is determined that the stored contents are not normal, the stored contents are not automatically restored, and the error state is controlled, and the variable data for games and the non-games are used as the error state is released. Since both of the variation data are initialized, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an error occurring in either the game variation data or the non-game data.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-4 is the gaming machine according to configuration 4-1 or 4-2.
When the control means determines that the stored contents are not normal (when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed), the game variable data area (game RAM area) and the non-game variable data area (the non-game variable data area). It is characterized by initializing both of the non-gaming RAM areas).
According to this feature, when it is determined that the stored contents are not normal, both the game variation data and the non-game variation data are initialized, so that either the game variation data or the non-game variation data is abnormal. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with the occurrence of.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 4-1 to 4-4.
The control means prohibits access to both the game variable data area (game RAM area) and the non-game variable data area (non-game RAM area) when the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the game RAM area). Setting to prohibit access to RAM 41c in power failure processing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only the game variable data area used for determining whether the stored content is normal or not, but also the non-game variable data area is prohibited from accessing, so the non-game variable data area is used. This can prevent unauthorized data from being stored.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 4-1 to 4-5.
Interruption is prohibited during the execution of the non-game program (interruption is set to prohibit before calling the non-game program).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated due to the execution of an unintended process during the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 4-1 to 4-6.
The second storage area includes a stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program (game program) and a stack area (non-game stack) for saving data used by the non-game program (non-game program). It is characterized by having a separate area) and.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas provided separately, so that the stack area can be easily managed.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 4-1 to 4-7.
An address storage means (vector table) that can store the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process, and
A determination means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored).
When it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within the predetermined range, the start limiting means (in the main control unit 41, the address of the vector table is in the program area of the program or the like. If it is not the area actually stored, it will not be started),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt process from being executed in advance.

The gaming machine of configuration 4-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 4-1 to 4-8.
It is provided with a setting means (setting of various functions performed by referring to the HW parameter) for setting the control means.
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after the setting by the setting means is performed, and prohibits interruption (starting) before the processing based on the program is started. Interruption prohibition setting by time setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

The game machine of configuration 5-1
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A storage means (ROM41b) having a storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program), and
A control means (main control unit 41) that performs control based on a program stored in the storage means, and
With
The storage area is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored, and
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored,
Including
The control means
The basic process (main process) based on the game program is executed, and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)) based on the game program is executed by interrupting the basic process at predetermined time intervals.
The non-game program may be called from both the basic process (main process) and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)).
When calling the non-game program from the basic process (main process), interrupting of other processes is prohibited (interruption is set to prohibit and the non-game program is called), and the interrupt process (timer interrupt) is performed. When calling the non-game program from the process (main)), interrupts of other processes are not prohibited (calling the non-game program without setting interrupts to prohibit).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area. Are assigned separately to each other, so that the gaming program and the non-gaming program can be easily identified according to the difference in the storage area. Also, while interrupting other processes is prohibited when calling a non-game program from the basic process, the non-game program is used when calling a non-game program from the interrupt process, that is, in a situation where further interruption is unlikely to occur. Since interrupts of other processes are not prohibited when the program is called, it is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of interrupts while preventing malfunctions due to interrupts being executed during execution of a non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-2 is the gaming machine according to configuration 5-1.
In the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)), the control means performs a non-game program (for example, LED dynamic display process) before a predetermined process (for example, LED dynamic display process) among a plurality of processes constituting the interrupt process. For example, it is characterized by calling the command transmission process during normal operation.
According to this feature, since the non-game program is called at the earliest possible stage among the plurality of processes constituting the interrupt process, it is possible to prevent the interrupt from being executed during the execution of the non-game program.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 5-1 or 5-2.
It is characterized in that a stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program and a stack area (non-game stack area) for saving data used by the non-game program are separately provided.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas provided separately, so that the stack area can be easily managed.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means configurations 5-1 to 5-3.
When the non-game program (non-game program) is executed, the control means saves the value of the register used in the game program (game program) to the stack area (game stack area), and then saves the non-game. It is characterized by executing processing in a program (non-game program).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the value of the register used by the game program from being changed as the non-game program is executed.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-5 is the gaming machine of configuration 5-4.
When the non-game program (non-game program) is executed, the control means is a common program (common call) that saves the register value used in the game program (game program) in a stack area (game stack area). It is characterized in that process 1 and call common process 2) are called.
According to this feature, since the program to be executed when the non-game program is executed is standardized, the program capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 5-1 to 5-5.
An address storage means (vector table) that can store the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process, and
A determination means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored).
When it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within the predetermined range, the start limiting means (in the main control unit 41, the address of the vector table is in the program area of the program or the like. If it is not the area actually stored, it will not be started),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt process from being executed in advance.

The gaming machine of configuration 5-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 5-1 to 5-6.
It is provided with a setting means (setting of various functions performed by referring to the HW parameter) for setting the control means.
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after the setting by the setting means is performed, and prohibits interruption (starting) before the processing based on the program is started. Interruption prohibition setting by time setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-1
In a game machine (slot machine 1) that plays a game
A storage means (ROM41b) having a storage area (game program area, non-game program area) capable of storing a program (game program, non-game program), and
A control means (main control unit 41) that performs control based on a program stored in the storage means, and
With
The storage area is
A game program area (game program area) in which a game program (game program) related to the progress of the game is stored, and
A non-game program area (non-game program area) in which a non-game program (non-game program) that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored,
Including
The control means
The basic process (main process) based on the game program is executed, and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)) based on the game program is executed by interrupting the basic process at predetermined time intervals.
The non-game program may be called from both the basic process (main process) and the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)).
When the non-game program (non-game program area) is called from the basic process (main process), the non-game program (non-game program area) is also called from the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)). At times, it is characterized by prohibiting interruptions in other processes.
According to this feature, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of a game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area. Are assigned separately to each other, so that the gaming program and the non-gaming program can be easily identified according to the difference in the storage area. Further, when the non-game program is called from the basic process and when the non-game program is called from the interrupt process, the interrupt of other processes is prohibited, so that the interrupt is executed during the execution of the non-game program. It is possible to prevent malfunction due to this.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-2 is the gaming machine according to configuration 6-1.
When the control means calls the non-game program (non-game program area) from the basic process (main process), the control means releases the prohibition of interruption with the end of the non-game program (non-game program area). When the non-game program (non-game program area) is called from the interrupt process (timer interrupt process (main)), the prohibition of interruption is maintained even after the end of the non-game program (non-game program area). It is characterized by.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the prohibition of interrupts from being lifted by executing a non-game program even while the interrupt process is being executed.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-3 is the gaming machine according to configuration 6-1 or 6-2.
A stack area (game stack area) for saving data used by the game program (game program area) and a stack area (non-game stack area) for saving data used by the non-game program (non-game program area) are provided. It is characterized by being prepared separately.
According to this feature, the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program are saved in the stack areas provided separately, so that the stack area can be easily managed.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6-1 to 6-3.
When the non-game program (non-game program area) is executed, the control means saves the value of the register used in the game program (game program area) into the stack area (game stack area), and then saves the value of the register in the stack area (game stack area). It is characterized by executing processing in a non-game program (non-game program area).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the value of the register used by the game program from being changed as the non-game program is executed.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-5 is the gaming machine according to configuration 6-4.
When the non-game program (non-game program area) is executed, the control means saves the value of the register used in the game program (game program area) into the stack area (game stack area). It is characterized by calling the call common process 1 and the call common process 3).
According to this feature, since the program to be executed when the non-game program is executed is standardized, the program capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6-1 to 6-5.
An address storage means (vector table) that can store the address of the interrupt program (timer interrupt process (main)) for executing the interrupt process, and
A determination means for determining at startup whether or not the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is within a predetermined range (the area of the program area in which the program or the like is actually stored).
When it is determined that the address stored in the address storage means (vector table) is not within the predetermined range, the start limiting means (in the main control unit 41, the address of the vector table is in the program area of the program or the like. If it is not the area actually stored, it will not be started),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interrupt process from being executed in advance.

The gaming machine of configuration 6-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of configurations 6-1 to 6-6.
It is provided with a setting means (setting of various functions performed by referring to the HW parameter) for setting the control means.
The control means executes processing based on a program (game program or non-game program) after the setting by the setting means is performed, and prohibits interruption (starting) before the processing based on the program is started. Interruption prohibition setting by time setting)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an unintended interruption from occurring.

The gaming machines of configuration 7 include configurations 2-1 to 2-9, configurations 3-1 to 3-9, configurations 4-1 to 4-9, configurations 5-1 to 5-7, and configurations 6-1 to 7. It is a game machine described in either
A plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) and
When any of a plurality of types of time timing conditions (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) is satisfied, a timer value storage area (for example, 1-byte timer A) corresponding to the time timing conditions is satisfied. To C), a timer value storage means (main process) for storing the timer value according to the timing condition, and
A timer value updating means (time counter updating process) capable of updating the timer values stored in a plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) every predetermined cycle (about 2.24 ms).
With
Consecutive addresses (804CH to 804EH) are assigned to a plurality of timer value storage areas (for example, 1-byte timers A to C) according to a predetermined rule (+1).
The timer value update means performs a predetermined operation (designated address + 1) for an update process (process of subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the pointer) for updating the timer value stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the specified address. The feature is that multiple types of timer values can be updated by repeatedly executing while changing the specified address for the timer value storage area.
According to this feature, consecutive addresses are assigned to a plurality of timer value storage areas according to a predetermined rule, and an update process for updating the timer values stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the specified address is predetermined. Since multiple types of timer values are updated by repeatedly executing while changing the specified address for the timer value storage area by performing the operation of, when performing the process of updating multiple types of timer values for each type of timer value. The program capacity can be reduced.
It should be noted that the assignment of consecutive addresses according to a predetermined rule means that, for example, an address to which N (N is a natural number) is added from the start address and the start address is assigned.
In addition, changing the designated address for the timer value storage area by performing a predetermined operation means, for example, changing the designated address by adding or subtracting a value according to the number of processes to the current designated address. It corresponds to changing the designated address by adding or subtracting a constant from the reference address. At this time, the value or constant according to the number of processes may differ depending on the storage capacity of the timer value. For example, in the configuration where the timer value is stored byte by byte, the value according to the number of processes is the number of processes. Depending on the number of processes, the values will be 1, 2, 3 ..., and the constant will be 1, but if the timer value is stored by 2 bytes, the value according to the number of processes will be 2, 4, 6 ... Depending on the number of processes. , The constant is 2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games, a continuous combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a character payout between the past 6000 games. The ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the game machine information display 50. However, instead of this, the sub-control unit for executing the effect may perform display control.
Further, the main control unit 41 uses the ring buffer to obtain the total number of medals given in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) as the data related to the winning of the game, the total number of payouts, and the specific period (this). In the embodiment, the number of bonuses paid out, which is the number of medals given during the period controlled by BB or RB in 6000 games), and the period controlled by BB in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). The number of consecutive games paid out, which is the number of medals given to, and the advantageous section controlled by AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning AT, the remaining games of AT after being controlled by AT) Advantageous section payout number, which is the number of medals given in the period until the number becomes 0 and the control of AT is completed, and the advantageous section (AT) controlled by AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). After winning the game, the number of games in the game section, which is the number of games (the period from when the game is controlled by the AT until the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is finished), is counted. Instead of this format, the present invention can have two types of total cumulative totals as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57. Specifically, it has an RWM10000 for total cumulative storage and an RWM10001 for total cumulative storage, and data on winning a game is accumulated and stored in each game, RWM10000, and 10001. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to the winning of the game at the predetermined opportunity for the total cumulative storage RWM10000, the continuous combination payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio calculated based on the total from the deleted timing to the present can be obtained. It can be displayed as a short-term continuous service payout ratio and a short-term product payout ratio, and the continuous service payout ratio and the character payout ratio calculated based on the total of RWM10001 for total cumulative storage are the cumulative continuous service payout ratio and the cumulative total. It can be displayed as an accessory payout ratio. With such a configuration, it is sufficient to simply have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to winning a game, and there is no need for processing such as a ring buffer for storing and updating a certain amount of information. It is preferable because it becomes.

As a predetermined trigger, for example, the power ON or OFF can be triggered. According to this, it is possible to aggregate information on winning a game from turning on the power, that is, to display the daily continuous service payout ratio and the character payout ratio as the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term character payout ratio. Can be done. Further, in this case, RWM10002 is provided to save the cumulative value of the total cumulative storage RWM10000 when it is deleted, and the cumulative value of the RWM10002 is displayed as the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio. This is preferable because the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio for one day before the power is turned on can be displayed. By using a real-time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to accurately total the short-term continuous payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio, for example, one day and one hour.

In addition, the predetermined trigger can be a setting change, a door opening, a sensor for detecting a player, or the like. According to this, even if it is not a one-day period like turning on the power, the short-term continuous payout ratio is a cohesive period (between setting change and setting change, between door opening and door opening, etc.). And it is preferable because the short-term accessory payout ratio can be displayed. Further, as a predetermined opportunity, the same effect can be obtained even if the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of times the big hit reaches the predetermined number of times.
In addition, instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as RWM10000 and 10001, two areas may be formed in the RWM area of the memory space.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ring buffer format may be replaced with a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, the area 20000 in which the data related to the winning of the game is collected and aggregated for each game, and the cumulative results in the areas B1 and 800G for storing the cumulative result of the information related to the winning of the game in the 400Gth are stored. Area B2 to be stored, and area B15 to store the cumulative result of information regarding the winning of the 1200 ... 6000G games are provided. Then, information on the winning of the game is added to and updated in the area 20000, and the data on the winning of the game accumulated and stored in the area 20000 on condition that the 400Gth is reached (specific period (specific period (specific period)). In this embodiment, the total number of medals awarded in 6000 games), the total number of medals granted in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) controlled by BB or RB. The number of bonuses paid out, the number of medals granted during the period controlled by the BB in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment), the number of consecutive medals paid out, the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) ) Is the number of medals awarded in the advantageous section controlled by the AT (the period from when the AT is controlled until the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is completed). Advantageous section payout number, advantageous section controlled by AT in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning AT, after being controlled by AT, the number of remaining games of AT becomes 0 and AT control ends. The value of the number of games in the game section, which is the number of games in the period until the game is played), is stored in the area B1. Further, on condition that the 800th G is reached, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the data regarding the winning of the game accumulated in the area 20000 is stored in the area B1. In this way, the information of the area 20000 is put into the area B1 every 400Gth, and the information of the other areas is shifted. Further, after the 6400th Gth, the information regarding the winning of the game stored in the area B14 is deleted, and the information in the area B13 is controlled to be transferred to the area B14.

With this configuration, the joint combination payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the area 20000 can be displayed as the cumulative joint payout ratio and the cumulative bonus payout ratio. In addition, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 20000, the latest 6000G (that is, for about 10 hours) continuous service payout ratio and the character payout ratio are displayed as the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term character payout ratio. Can be done. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 20000, the continuous service payout ratio and the character payout ratio of the latest 400 G (that is, about one hour) can be displayed as the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term character payout ratio. it can.

Further, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 58, only the region B10 may be provided as shown in FIG. 59. According to this, it is not possible to obtain a detailed continuous service payout ratio and character payout ratio of about 1 hour, but the short-term continuous service payout ratio and short-term character payout ratio of the latest 6000 G (approximately 10 hours) are displayed. It is preferable that the capacity is small because it can be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ring buffer format may be replaced with a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 60. Specifically, it has a total cumulative storage RWM30000 and a total cumulative storage RWM30001, and in order to display the continuous combination payout ratio and the accessory payout ratio, the data related to the winning of the game is accumulated and stored in the RWM30000 and 30001. Let's go.
The total cumulative storage RWM30000 accumulates and stores from the 1Gth, whereas the total cumulative storage RWM30001 waits without storing from the 1G to the 6000G and accumulates from the 6001Gth. Try to remember. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM30000 and the total cumulative storage RWM30001 is 6000G, and by subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM30001 from the total cumulative storage RWM30000, the continuous payout ratio and the accessory payout for 6000G. The ratio can be displayed as a short-term continuous service payout ratio and a short-term bonus payout ratio. In addition, the joint combination payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM30000 can be displayed as the cumulative joint payout ratio and the cumulative bonus payout ratio.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ring buffer format may be replaced with a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 61. Specifically, the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 and the total cumulative counter 40002 are provided, and the total cumulative counter 40002 is provided with data related to winning a game from the 1st G to each game in order to display the continuous combination payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio. , Accumulate and memorize. The joint combination payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the total cumulative counter 40002 can be displayed as the cumulative joint payout ratio and the cumulative bonus payout ratio.

On the other hand, the two counters of the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 display the continuous service payout ratio and the bonus payout ratio for 6000 G as the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 40000 starts each game and totaling from the 1st G, and clears when the 6000th is reached. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 40001 starts each game and totaling from the 3000th G, and clears it when it reaches the 9000G. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term bonus payout ratio for 6000 G, for example, in the 3000 G to 6000 G, the calculation is based on the total of the cumulative counter 40000, and in the 6001 G to 9000 G Is calculated based on the aggregation of the cumulative counter 40001.
In this way, the cumulative counters 40000 and 40001 are totaled so as to deviate by 3000 G. Therefore, when displaying the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term product payout ratio, it is at least within 3000 G minutes, that is, 5 hours. It is possible to display the short-term continuous service payout ratio and the short-term product payout ratio within the previous period. According to this, it is preferable because it is possible to suppress the increase in capacity and to display the relatively recent short-term continuous service payout ratio and short-term bonus payout ratio.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 12 Game auxiliary display 41 Main control unit 41c RAM
50 Game machine information display 91 Sub control unit 91c RAM

Claims (2)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a gaming machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A game control means that controls the game,
An effect control means that performs an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result,
The first notification means controlled by the game control means and
The second notification means controlled by the effect control means and
With
The game control means
Predetermining means to determine the display result that allows derivation,
A means for controlling to derive a display result, and when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific determination result of any one of a plurality of types of specific determination results, the type of the specific determination result. When the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode according to the above, it is more advantageous for the player than when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode other than the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. Derivation control means that controls the derivation of various display results,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result, the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. A first notification control means capable of controlling,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result and the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. The operation mode control information transmitting means for transmitting the operation mode control information capable of specifying the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result to the effect control means is included.
When the effect control means receives the operation mode control information, the effect control means transmits the effect operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result specified from the operation mode control information to the second notification means. Including a second notification control means for controlling notification
The operation mode control information transmitting means transmits the operation mode control information to the effect control means before the notification of the game operation mode information is started by the first notification means.
The first notification control means is
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the game operation mode information.
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, even when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, the notification of the game operation mode information is continued. Take control and
The second notification control means is
After starting the notification of the effect operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the effect operation mode information.
Control to end the notification of the effect operation mode information when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information after the notification of the effect operation mode information is started. And
The game machine
When a grant prize that accompanies the granting of game value occurs, a game value-adding means that grants a number of game values according to the type of the grant prize, and
Advantageous control means to control in favor of the player,
The total number of game values granted in a specific period The ratio of the total number of game values granted in a specific advantageous period to the total number granted in a specific period, which is the total number of game values granted in an advantageously controlled period. A calculation method for calculating the advantageous period grant ratio,
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio, and
A notification means for identifiablely notifying the specific advantageous period grant ratio calculated by the calculation means, and
Excess avoidance means for preventing the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the specific advantageous period grant ratio from exceeding the upper limit value, and
Data storage means that can read and write data,
With more
The numerical value updating means updates the numerical value necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period granting ratio without waiting for the granting of the game value to be completed when the display result in which the granting prize is generated is derived.
The game control means controls based on the first program and the second program called by the first program.
The data storage means includes a variable data storage area capable of storing data used when the game control means performs control based on a program, and a stack area for temporarily storing data used by the program.
The variable data storage area is
A first variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the first program and not updated in the second program.
A second variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the second program but not updated in the first program.
Including
The stack area is
A first stack area for temporarily saving data used by the first program, and
A second stack area for temporarily saving data used by the second program, and
Including
The first variable data storage area is an area from the start address to the first address of the variable data storage area.
The first stack area is an area from the second address to the third address after the first address of the variable data storage area.
The second variable data storage area is an area from the fourth address to the fifth address after the third address of the variable data storage area.
The second stack area is an area from the sixth address after the fifth address of the variable data storage area.
When the game control means calls the second program from the first program, the game control means saves the data used by the first program in the first stack area in the first program, and then calls the second program. A gaming machine that executes a process based on the second program, and after the process based on the second program is completed, returns the data used by the first program from the first stack area in the first program. Equipped with a variable display unit that can variablely display multiple types of identification information that can be identified by each.
In a gaming machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result.
A game control means that controls the game,
An effect control means that performs an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means, and
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result,
The first notification means controlled by the game control means and
The second notification means controlled by the effect control means and
With
The game control means
Predetermining means to determine the display result that allows derivation,
A means for controlling to derive a display result, and when the determination result of the prior determination means becomes a specific determination result of any one of a plurality of types of specific determination results, the type of the specific determination result. When the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode according to the above, it is more advantageous for the player than when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode other than the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. Derivation control means that controls the derivation of various display results,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result, the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. A first notification control means capable of controlling,
When the determination result of the prior determination means becomes any kind of specific determination result and the first notification means is notified of the game operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result. The operation mode control information transmitting means for transmitting the operation mode control information capable of specifying the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result to the effect control means is included.
When the effect control means receives the operation mode control information, the effect control means transmits the effect operation mode information corresponding to the operation mode according to the type of the specific determination result specified from the operation mode control information to the second notification means. Including a second notification control means for controlling notification
The operation mode control information transmitting means transmits the operation mode control information to the effect control means before the notification of the game operation mode information is started by the first notification means.
The first notification control means is
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the game operation mode information.
After starting the notification of the game operation mode information, even when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the game operation mode information, the notification of the game operation mode information is continued. Take control and
The second notification control means is
After starting the notification of the effect operation mode information, when the derivation operation means is operated in the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information, control is performed to continue the notification of the effect operation mode information.
Control to end the notification of the effect operation mode information when the derivation operation means is operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode corresponding to the effect operation mode information after the notification of the effect operation mode information is started. And
The game machine
Advantageous control means to control in favor of the player,
A calculation means for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, which is the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, which is the number of games controlled advantageously in the specific period to the number of games in the specific period.
Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical value required for the calculating means to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period, and
A notification means for identifiablely notifying the ratio of the number of games during a specific advantageous period calculated by the calculation means, and
Excess avoidance means for preventing the numerical value required for the calculation means to calculate the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period to exceed the upper limit value, and
Data storage means that can read and write data,
With more
The numerical value updating means updates the numerical value necessary for calculating the ratio of the number of games in the specific advantageous period without waiting for the granting of the game value to be completed when the display result in which the grant prize is generated is derived. ,
The game control means controls based on the first program and the second program called by the first program.
The data storage means includes a variable data storage area capable of storing data used when the game control means performs control based on a program, and a stack area for temporarily storing data used by the program.
The variable data storage area is
A first variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the first program and not updated in the second program.
A second variable data storage area that is updated and referenced in the second program but not updated in the first program.
Including
The stack area is
A first stack area for temporarily saving data used by the first program, and
A second stack area for temporarily saving data used by the second program, and
Including
The first variable data storage area is an area from the start address to the first address of the variable data storage area.
The first stack area is an area from the second address to the third address after the first address of the variable data storage area.
The second variable data storage area is an area from the fourth address to the fifth address after the third address of the variable data storage area.
The second stack area is an area from the sixth address after the fifth address of the variable data storage area.
When the game control means calls the second program from the first program, the game control means saves the data used by the first program in the first stack area in the first program, and then calls the second program. A gaming machine that executes a process based on the second program, and after the process based on the second program is completed, returns the data used by the first program from the first stack area in the first program.